Clavis Bibliorum The key of the Bible, unlocking the richest treasury of the Holy Scriptures : whereby the 1 order, 2 names, 3 times, 4 penmen, 5 occasion, 6 scope, and 7 principall parts, containing the subject-matter of every book of Old and New Testament, are familiarly and briefly opened : for the help of the weakest capacity in the understanding of the whole Bible / by Francis Roberts ...

CLAVIS BIBLIORVM . THE KEY OF THE BIBLE : Unlocking The richest Treasury of the Holy Scriptures .

THE HOLY SCRIPTURES , Rom. 1.2 . were written by Moses , the Prophets , the Apostles , and other holy men of God , Luk. 16.29.31 . Eph. 2.20 . and 3.5 . and 2 Pet. 1.21 . The Covenant of God with man in Christ the Mediatour , that substantiall or begotten WORD , Iohn 1.1 . is the Principall Subject Revealed and explained in the whole Scripturall , or written WORD .

Gods COVENANT with man in Christ is represented to us in Holy Scripture principally two wayes . viz. 1. As Promised , fore-prophecied and typified In Christ to be manifested afterwards in the flesh . Hence called the Covenants of Promise , Eph. 2.10 . Covenants , not Covenant : because of the severall Publications of the Covenant with more and more Augmentations , in severall Points or Periods of time . Thus the Covenant is made known in all the Bookes of Scripture , written before Christs comming : which are therefore called the OLD-COVENANT , Heb. 8.13 . or the OLD-TESTAMENT , 2 Cor. 3.14 .

2. As performed , fulfilled and actually accomplished in Christ already come , and manifested in our flesh in fulnesse of time , Gal. 4.4 , 5. Heb. 9. Heb. 10. Thus the Covenant is most clearly and fully unveyled to us in all the Books of Scripture written since Christs coming ; which are therefore stiled the NEW COVENANT or the NEW TESTAMENT Heb. 8.8 . Matth. 26.28 . Heb. 9.15 .

Thus the whole BIBLE is distributed into the 1 Old ; and 2 New Testament .

THE OLD TESTAMENT .

THE OLD TESTAMENT , ( revealing the Covenants of promise ) in respect of the Penmen whom the Holy Ghost imployed to write the Books thereof , is disparted by the Holy Ghost himselfe into two generall heads , viz. 1 Moses , and 2 the Prophets , Luk. 16.29.31 . and 24.27 . Iohn 1.45 . or , The Law of Moses ; and the Prophets , Act. 28.23 .

J. MOSES .

MOSES ( the man of God , Psal. 90.1 . The first Penman of Scripture : ) was an Ebrew borne in Egypt , after the worlds creation about 2432 years , before Christ about 1496. years ; * * Mose● is the seventh from Abraham , a New Henoch , who was the seventh from Adam . So was Eber the seventh from Enoch ; and Isaac the seventh from Eber. All excellent among ordinary men . As the Sabbath in regard of the six other daies . The view of Holy Script . p. 133. The seventh from Abraham , the father of the faithfull , 1 Chron. 6.1 , 2 , 3. and 2.1 . and 1.34 . As Enoch was the seventh from Adam the father of the world , Iude 14. When Moses was borne he was very fair , Act. 7.20 , 21 , 22. He was marvellously saved from death being drawne out of the water , whence his name MOSES , i. e. Drawn-forth , was given to him , Exod. 2 10 He was nourished by King Pharao●s daughter for her own sonne , Ex. 2.9 , 10. Act. 7.21 . Learned in all the wisedome of the Egyptians , and mighty in words and in deeds , Act. 7.22 . He lived in Pharaohs Court 40. years , and then left the Court , choosing rather to suffer affliction with the people of God , &c , Act. 7.23 . Heb. 11.24 , 25 , 26. He was a stranger , a shepheard in the land of Madian 40. years , Act. 7.29.30 . Exod. 3. thence God called him to feed Iacob his people , and Israel his inheritance . He fed Israel most faithfully 40. years , Numb . 12.7 . Heb. 3.2.5 . being in the Church in the wildernesse , Act. 7.38 . with the Angel that spoke to him on Mount Sinai , and with our fathers , where he received the lively Oracles to give unto us , and commanded us a law which is the inheritance of the Church of Iacob , Deut. 33.4 . Of all the Prophets that arose in Israel , there was none like Moses whom God knew face to face , Deut. 34.10 . He dyed 120. years old , his eye not being dimme nor his naturall strength abated , and was buried of God , no man knowing of his sepulcher to this day . Deut. 34.5.6.7 .

MOSES wrote the Law of God in the five first Bookes , called in Greek the Pentateuch , i. e. The five-fold-volume . At first it seemes to be written in one volume or Roll , there being such a continued connection of Book with Book , Exod. 1.1 . Levit. 1.1 . Num. 1.1 . Deut. 1.1 . But was afterwards , according to the several subject matters therin contained , divided into five severall Books , Containing 1 An History of things past : 2 A Covenant between God and his Church then present : 3 And a Prophecy of further grace to come , now exhibited by Iesus Christ , Deut. 18.15 . &c. Iohn 5.46 . and 1.17 . In Propounding of which things , ( as Ainsworth observes ) Moses hath a veile upon his glorious face : for in the Histories are implied Allegories , Gal. 2.24 . And in the Lawes are types and shadows of good things to come ; the body whereof is of Christ , Heb. 9.9 . and 10.1 . Col. 2.17 . In Genesis ( which History endeth with Israels going downe into Egypt , ) we have the image of a naturall man , fallen from God into the bondage of sin . In Exodus , is the type of our Regeneration , and State renewed by Iesus Christ . In Leviticus the shadow of our mortification , whilst we are made sacrifices unto God . In Numbers , our spirituall warfare , whereunto we are mustered , and armed to ●ight the good fight of faith . In Deuteronomie , the Doctrine of our sanctification , and Preparation to enter into our heavenly Canaan , after Moses death , by the conduct of Iesus the son of God . So H. Ainsworth in his Preface before his Annotat. on Gen. &c.

Genesis .

GENESIS i. e. Generation , so called by the Greek ; because it sets forth the Generations of the heavens & of the earth , in their first creation , Gen. 2.4 . The Hebrews name their Books of the Old Testament , either 1 From the Prophets , the Penmen of them . Or 2 From the Principall subject or Argument handled in them : Or 3 From the first Hebrew word wherewith they begin , as the 5. Books of Moses , & the Lament. of Ieremiah . Hence Genesis is called in Hebrew 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Bereschith i. e. In the beginning .

Penman . It is not probable this Book was written by Moses whilst a Private man , and a shepheard in Madian , in the desert : but rather after he was a Publick person , and furnished with a Prophetick spirit ; otherwise the credit and authority of this History would be too much enfeebled . Nor is it absurd which some Hebrew writers think , who referre this writing to that of Exod. 24.12 . Come up to me into the mount , and be thou there , and I will give thee the Tables of stone , and the Law , and the Precepts , which I have written to teach them . Understanding by the Tables , the Decalogue : by the Precepts all the Ceremoniall , and Iudiciall Ordinances : and by the Law all other writings of Moses , whether Historicall or Dogmaticall , D. Paraeus in Prolegom . in Genes. p. 14.15 . in fol.

This Book as it is absolutely the ancientest writing extant in the world : so it is most compendious ; being an History of 2369 years , as Ainsw . thinks , or rather of 2368 as Iunius and Paraeus comput . Iun. Annot. in Gen. 1. Parae . Prologom . in Genes. This may appeare in three eminent Intervals or Periods of time recorded in Genesis . viz. I. From the Creation to the beginning of the flood , in Noahs 600th yeare , through 10 Generations ; 1656 yeares . Gen. 5. and 6.11 . viz. From Adams Creation to Seth's Nativity , 130 years . From Seth to Enos , 105. From Enos to Cainan 90. From Cainan to Mahalee● 70. From Mahaleel to Iared ▪ 65. From Iared to Enoch , 162. From Enoch to Mathusalah . 65. From Mathusalah to Lamech , 187. From Lamech to Noah's birth , 182. From Noah's birth to the beginning of the flood , 600 in all 1656. II. The second Period of time , is ; From the beginning of the flood , through other 10 Generations to Abrahams birth , 352 years , Gen. 11. viz. From the Flood to Arphaxad , 2 years . From Arphaxad to Selah , 35 years . From Selah to Heber , 30 years From Eber to Peleg , 34 years . From Peleg to Reu , 30 years . From Reu to Serug , 32 years . From Serug to Nachor , 30 years . From Nachor to Terah , 29 years . From Terah to Abraham , 130 years . In all 352 years . So that Abraham was borne in the 2008 yeare from the Creation . III. The third Period , is ; From Abrahams birth to Josephs death , through foure Generations , 360 years , viz. From Birth of Abraham to the birth of Isaac , 100 years , Gen. 17.17 . and 21.5 . From Isaacs birth to Iacobs birth , 60 years , Gen. 25.26 . From Iacobs birth to his going down into Egypt , 130 years , Gen. 47.9 . From Iacobs descent into Egypt to his death , 17 years , Gen. 47.28 . From death of Iacob to the death of Ioseph 53 years , which may be thus gathered . Ioseph died when he was 110 years old , Gen. 50.26 . He stood before Pharaoh when he was 30 years old , Gen. 41.46 . After the seven years of plenty , in the third yeare of famine Iacob came into Egypt , in the one hundred and thirtieth yeare of Iacob , and fourtieth yeare of Ioseph , Gen. 45.6 . Ioseph lived with his father in Egypt seventeen years . Therefore when his father dyed , Ioseph was 57 years old . Consequently he lived after his fathers death 53 years , Gen. 50.26 . So that the totall of this third Intervall , amounts to 360 years . And therefore 1656 and 352 and 360 being added together : This History of Genesis , is evidently an History of 2368 yeares continuance .

The scope of Genesis , is to set forth , The Generation of the world : The corruption thereof by sin : The Restauration thereof by Christ the seed of the woman , together with the Government of the old world before the flood , and the foll●●ing world after the flood , especially of the Church of God in particular families in both .

Principall parts of this Book . In Genesis are described ▪ I. The Originall 1 Of the world . chap. 1. 2. Of Mankinde , and so of the Church . ch. 2.3 . Of sinne and punishment thereof , ch. 3. II. The Government . 1. Of the Old World before the Flood , where are 1. The Propogation of sin and punishment from Adam to posterity . c. 4. 2. Preservation of the Church in the sinfull world . c. 5. 3. Iudgements of God upon the world , Foretold . c. 6. Inflicted , c. 7. 2. Of the World following after the Flood ; according to the times of divers renowned Patriarchs , Noah , Abraham , Isaac , Iacob . 1. Noah , whose 1 Deliverance from the Flood c. 8. 2. Benediction . c. 9. 3. Family , 1 as united , c. 10. 2 as dispersed c. 11. are recorded . 2. Abraham , touching whom are laid down 1 His Calling from his Country and kindred c. 12.1 to ver. 10. 2. His going down , Into Egypt , ver. 10. to the end , Into Canaan c. 13. 3. His rescuing of Lot , c. 14. 4. His dealing with God , who , 1 Promises him issue c. 15. 2 Performes to him by Hagar . c. 16. 3 Makes a Covenant with Abraham ; whereof note , The forme c. 17. The fruit or effect of it 1 On Gods part , viz. Communication of his Counsels to him . ch. 18. and of his Benefits ch. 19 , 20 , 21. 2 On Abrahams part divers sweet fruits , viz. 1 The obedience of his faith , c. 22. 2 His Humanity c. 23. 3 His Piety in the matching of his sonne c. 24. 3. Isaac , whose 1 Posterity , c. 25. 2. Peregrination into the land of Egypt , c. 26. 3. Benediction of his two sons , c. 27. are mentioned . 4. Iacob , whose three Peregrinations are declared . viz. I. Into Mesopotamia , wherin note , 1. His journey c. 28. 2. His Arrivall and marriage , c. 29. 3. His increase in goods , and children c. 30. II. Into Canaan , where observe , His passage hither , c. 31. 4 His abode there , where the things that befell him are recited , viz. 1. His meeting of his brother Esau , with 1 preparation for it , c. 32. 2 manner of it , c. 33. His daughter Dinah's defilement c. 34. 2. Rachels death c. 35. & 3. Isaacs death and buriall by Iacob and Esau , where is mentioned Esaus race , c 35.36 . Selling of Ioseph c. 37. Incest of Iudah , c. 38. III. Into Egypt : of which Peregrination of Iacob , are mentioned , The Antecedents , The Manner , and Consequents . Antecedents . viz. 1. Iosephs being made knowne to the Egyptians , and to his owne kindred . To the Egyptians in Prison , c. 39.48 . out of Prison to the King and his people . c. 41. To his owne , Not at their first coming into Egypt to buy corne . c. 42. But at their second coming , c. 43.44.45 . where all the circumstances thereof are noted . 2. Iosephs sending for his father , c. 45. Manner , 1. Of Iacobs going thither , c. 46. 2. Of Iacobs being there , Where note , his conference with Pharaoh c. 47. His blessing of Ioseph c. 48. His Propheticall benedictions to all his sonnes , c. 49. Consequents upon Iacobs death c. 50.

Exodus .

EXODUS . i. e. Going-out ; or Departure , so called by the Greek , because it declares Israels Departure out of Egypt , after they had been long-oppressed there under Tyrannicall servitude . In Heb. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 veelleh schemoth , i. e. And these are the names , Exod. 1.1 .

Scope ; To set forth Gods governing and ordering of his Church , now reduced and united into one body , out of all the severall families of Israel . This is the Church in the wildernesse , Act. 7.38 .

Exodus is an History , from the death of Ioseph till the erecting of the Tabernacle , for about 142. years . viz. From death of Ioseph to the birth of Moses , 60 years . As Iunius computes . Annot. in Ex. From Moses birth to the Departure out of Egypt . 80 years , Exod. 7.7 . From the departure out of Egypt , to the erecting of the Tabernacle two years Exod. 40.17 . in the second yeare . viz. the second yeare after their coming out of Egypt . Iun. Annotat.

Principal Parts of this Book . Exodus contains an Historicall Narration of I. Gods Actions for Israels deliverance out of Egypt . Things done of God , were Before , In , or After Israels deliverance . I. Before their deliverance , are 1. His permission of the Egyptian Tyranny over them , which was the occasion of the deliverance c. 1. 2. His Preparation both of Instruments and Actions , for deliverance 1. Of Instruments . viz. Moses who is Borne c. 2. Called c. 3. Aaron c. 4. 2. Of Actions viz. Words c. 5.6 . Signes , both Confirming their words c. 7. and Punishing the Egyptians for not letting Israel go , with ten plagues , viz. 1 Turning water into blood , c. 7. 2 Frogs , 3 Lice , 4 And a mixed swarme of Flyes , c. 8. 5 Pestilence , 6 Boyles , 7 Haile , c. 9. 8 Locusts , and 9 Darknesse , c. 10. 10 Death of the first-borne , Foretold , c. 11. Fulfilled , c. 12. II. In their deliverance , where note 1. The●r departure , Egresse or going out , Acted c. 12. Attested for the benefit of Posterity , with signes and observations c. 13. 2. Their Progresse or going on . Whereof 1 Their passing through the Red sea , c. 14. 2 Their thanksgiving for this wonder of mercy in a gratulatory Song , c. 15. III. After their deliverance , when God did 1. Supply them with food and necessaries c. 16. 2. Defend them from evils c. 17. 3. Appoint Judicatories , for all matters of difference , that might fall out among them c. 18. II. Gods institutions , in which regard consider Gods Prescriptions , Israels performances . I. Gods prescriptions , where note , 1. Preparation of the people c. 19. 2. The promulgation of his lawes , 1 Moral with their Appendixes , c. 20. 2 Iudicial both in humane and sacred things c. 21 , 22 , 23. 3 Ceremoniall . Touching the Ceremoniall lawes , here are laid down , 1. The Preparation to them c. 24. 2. The parts of them . viz. 1 The Tabernacle with the Appurtenances and Utensils thereof , c. 25.26 , 27. 2 The Priests and their Ornaments or Vestments for Ministration , c. 28. 3 Sacrifices , c. 29. and divers sacred things , c. 30. 3. The close of ceremoniall directions , c. 31. II. Israels performances of Gods Prescriptions . Here consider Israels obedience . 1. About Morals ; 1 Violated by idolatry , c. 32. 2. Restored and renewed againe By reconciliation with God , c. 33. and Renewing of the Tables , c. 34. 2. About Ceremonials ; viz. 1. The Parts of the Tabernacle ; The matter chap. 35. The fashioning of the Tabernacle , c. 36. & of the Ark , c. 37. The making of sacred things belonging , To the people , c. 38. To the Priests , c. 39. 2. The totall disposing , ordering , and erecting of the Tabernacle , c. 40.

Leviticus

LEVITICUS . So denominated by the Greek , from the chiefe Subject or matter of the Book , which principally describes the lawes , sacrifices and services of the LEVITICAL Priesthood . It is stiled among the Hebrewes 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Vajikra . i. e. And he called . This being the first Hebrew word in the Hebrew text , beginning this book .

Scope of this Book . To make known Leviticall Lawes Sacrifices and Ordinances , and by those shadows to lead Israel by the hand to Jesus Christ the true Priest and sacrifice of the Church , See Levit. 11.44 . and 20.26 .

This Book relates the memorable words , Acts and Leviticall Ceremoniall Laws made known from God to Israel , for one Moneths space viz. from about the beginning of the second yeare , after Israels departure out of Egypt , the Tabernacle being already reared , till the beginning of the second moneth of the same yeare , As Jun. in Annot. compare Exod. 40.17 . with Numb . 1.1 . which was in the yeare , from the worlds Creation , 2514. As Ainsw . computes .

Principal Parts . Leviticus describes the sacred Ceremoniall law ▪ 1. Of things . 2. Of Persons . 3. Of Actions .

I. The Ceremoniall law of things , c. 1. to c. 8. either according to the substance of them , as of 1. Burnt-offerings , c. 1. 2. Meat-offerings , c. 2. 3. Peace-offerings , c. 3. 4. Sin-offerings , in case of ignorance , c. 4. or of infirmity , c. 5. Or , according to the Rite and Ceremony of them , c. 6.7 .

II. The Ceremoniall law of persons , c. 8. to 16. viz. 1. Of the Priests , In their consecration to their office , c. 8. In their discharge of their office , either according to Gods assistance , c. 9. Or mens infirmity , c. 10. 2. Of all the people , touching whom are lawes about their sanctification , both from uncleannesse without them , in matter of their food , c. 11. or In them ▪ By reason of 1 Child-bearing , c. 12. 2 Leprosie , whereof its Rise and State , c. 13. It s cure , c. 14. 3 Issue of seed or bloud , c. 15.

III. The Ceremonial Law touching Actions , Necessary or Voluntary .

1. Necessary , whereof are laid down The Particulars and the Confirmation of them . 1 the Particulars of these Necessary Actions , are 1. In purification , Common to the whole Church , c. 16. Proper to every godly person , c. 17. 2. In Sanctimony or Holinesse , Both of the people ; 1 To be observed , not only in their own bodies , c. 18. but also among one another mutually , c. 19. 2 To be maintained in their judgements , c. 20. As also in the holinesse of the Priests in their Persons , c. 21. Things , c. 22. 3. In exercise Ecclesiasticall , In legall Times c. 23. In legall Rites , c. 24. Politicall , c. 25. 2 The Confirmation or obsignation of these particular lawes , by Promises and Threats , c. 26.

2. Voluntary , viz. touching vows , c. 27.

Numbers

NUMBERS Gr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , so called because a great part of the Book is spent in Numbring the Tribes and Families of Israel , and of their journeys from Egypt to Canaan . In Hebr. its called 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Bammidbar i. e. In the Desert ▪ Because this is the first word of this Book in the Hebrew text .

Numbers containes an History from the beginning of the second moneth of the second yeare , after Israels coming ●ut of Egypt , to the beginning of the eleventh moneth of the fourtieth yeare . viz. 38. years and upwards , as Iun. and Ainsw . observe . And this may remarkably be evinced , by comparing Numb . 1.1 . and 36.13 . diligently with Deut. 1.3 . which , as above , demonstrate both the beginning and ending of this History of Numbers .

Scope . Lively to set forth the rich blessing of God upon Israel , in their wonderfull increase ; his vigilant providence over them in all their wildernes journeyes and difficulties ; and yet his severity against their corruption , for which many of them perished in the wildernesse , after they had been delivered out of Egypt , so that they could not enter into his rest because of their unbeliefe , Heb. 3.19 . Iude ver . 5.

Principall Parts .

This Book of Numbers containes an Historicall narration of Israels 1 Preparation for their Journey , 2 Iourney it selfe , and 3 of their Station ,

I. Israels Preparation for their Journey , wherein three things .

I. The Numbring of them , which was 1. Civil , both of all the heads of the people according to the families , c. 1. and of the order of the Tribes in their Tents , c. 2. 2. Sacred , where is reckoned up , both the number of Levites and other officers about the Tabernacle c. 3. as also their order and ministry c. 4. II. Lawes , 1. Common about Sanctimony , whether necessary c. 5. or voluntary , c. 6. 2. Particular for the Princes offering of every Tribe , at the dedication of the Tabernacle and Altar . c. 7. For the Levites service , c. 8. III. The manner 1. Of their sanctification and order , c. 9. And of their Journeying , c. 10.

II. Israels journeys , which are distinguished by the history of their eight notable Murmurings in their way , viz. 1. Irksomenesse of their Journey . 2. Loathing of Mannah , c. 11. 3. Aarons and Miriams emulation against Moses , c. 12. 4. Their unbelief at Kadesh , where are recorded , Their murmuring c. 13. The judgement of God for it c. 14. Their reconcilement to God afterwards , c. 15. 5. The envy of the Levites and others against the Priests , c. 16. 6. The indignation of the people for the precedent judgement , where are set down both their Murmur●ng , c. 16.41 , 42 , 43. and their Reconcilement , c. 16. vers. 44. to the end , and c. 17 , 18 , 19. 7. Murmuring for want of water , c. 20. 8. Murmuring because of the way , and the light bread , and so were plagued with fiery serpents , c. 21.

III. Israels Station , State or condition when they were now nigh to the possession of their inheritance , c. 21. to the end of the Book . Here is set down a double State or Condition . 1. Of the people themselves . 2. Of their inheritance .

1. Of the people themselves , either as 1. overcoming their enemies , and possessing the land , c. 21. 2. Tempted by Magicall Arts and inchantments , c. 22 , 23 , 24. 3. ●nsnared with , and plagued for idolatry and fornication c. 25. 4. Reconciled to God and numbred for the entring upon the inheritance , c. 26. 5. Furnished with a new Governour Ioshuah , that was to succeed Moses , c. 27. 6. Instructed in sacred things , Necessary , c. 28 , 29. Voluntary , c. 30.

2. Of the inheritance , which is considered , either 1. In part , As possessed , c. 31. As assigned to Gad , Reuben , and halfe the Tribe of Manasseh , c. 32. ( Here by way of digression is a summary recapitulation of the severall stations of Israel in their march through the wildernesse , c. 33. ) 2. In whole , And that either , As it is circumscribed with Bounds or Borders , whereof the manner of dividing the land , c. 34. Or as it is circumscribed with lawes , Both of refuge for the man-slayer , that slew any unawares , c. 35. And of successions in their inheritances . c. 36

Deuteron :

DEUTERONOMIE i. e. The second law , or Law repeated , Thus denominated by the Greek , because this book containeth a Repetition of Gods law given by Moses to Israel , AS in Hebrew it is sometimes from the same ground called 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 mischneh i. e. Repetition of the law . From the first words in the Book it s cal'd 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Elleh Haddebarim , i e. These are the words , or only 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Debarim , i. e. The words .

Penman of this Book , as of all the foure former Books was Moses , who also wrote the History of his own death aforehand in the last chapter by a Prophetick spirit ; or Ioshua wrote it for him . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 118.

This Book containes the History of but a few dayes , viz. from the beginning of the eleventh moneth , to about the seventh day of the twelfth moneth of the fourtieth yeare , after Israels departure out of Egypt , for Moses began to speak these words , in the first day of the eleventh moneth of the said fourtieth yeare , Deut. 1.3 . which was a little before his death ; he died when he was one hundred and twenty years old Deut. 34.7 ▪ after which Israel mourned for Moses in the land of Moab thirty dayes , Deut. 34.8 . this determines the time of the History ? As Iun. well observes .

Thus Alsted in Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 118. computes the time of this History . viz.

1. The first Part of this Book containes the History of the first day of the eleventh moneth of the fourtieth yeare , after their coming out of Egypt , c. 1 , 2 , 3 ▪ 4. 2. The second part contains the History of the second day , c. 5. to 11 ▪ 3. The third part containes the History , ( as is probable ) of foure dayes at most c. 11. to 26. 4. The fourth part containes the History of one day , c. 27.28 . 5. The fifth containes the History also of one day , c. 29 , 30. 6. The sixth containes the History of one day , c. 31. &c. 7. The 7th part contains the History of their mourning for Moses thirty daies c. 34.

Proofe hereof may be drawn from the History of Ioshua , by computing backwards from the day of the Passeover . For in the land of Canaan the first Passeover was celebrated , in the one and fourtieth year after Israels coming ou● of Egypt , on the fourteenth day of the moneth Nisan Josh. 5 , 10. Before which they were circumcised , which probably took up foure dayes , Josh. 5. One day they were passing thorough Jordan , two dayes in preparation for it . Adde to these the time of searching out the land , and lastly the thirty dayes mourning . And thus going backwards , we shall find that Deuteronomie containes an History of but a very few dayes .

Scope . That the law formerly given of God may by this New Repetition of it be more declared , confirmed and applied to the present condition of Israel ; and they thereby fitted and better prepared for the promised Canaan , upon which they were entring .

Principall Parts , are ; The Preface ; Narration ; and Conclusion of the Book . I. Preface or Prologue , c. 1. to 5. contayning , 1. A Narration . 1. Of Gods calling of Israel from Horeb to the promised Land . c. 1. 2. Of the execution of this call , Both by divine conduct against their enemies . c. 2. And by appointment to enter the Land . c. 3. 2. An exhortation to obed. c. 4.

II Narrative containing the main bulk and substance of the book , c. 5. to 32. viz. The Law , and Confirmation thereof .

I. The Law , shewing the way of well living . 1. Universall . c. 5. 2. Particular ; where , Of the Decalogues Principle , and things Principled . 1. The Principle of the Decalogue is Gods love , whereof you have , 1. The Proposition . Wherein note . 1. The manner and object of it , c. 6. 2. The opposites , Idolatry , c. 7. Ingratitude , c. 8. Pride , c 9. 2. The Conclusion . c. 10. 2. The things Principled , touching , 1. The place of divine worship c. 11 ▪ 12. 2. The manner , c. 13.14 . 3. The time , c. 15.16 . 4. The persons which are to performe worship to him . Who are informed according to the three parts of the soule , and this either joyntly or severally . Jointly . 1. According to the Rationall part ; Where , Of persons Ecclesiasticall and Politicall together , c. 17. Of persons Ecclesiasticall apart , c. 18. Of persons Politicall apart , c. 19. 2. According to the Irascible part , in case of war c. 20. 3. According to the Concupiscible part , c. 21 , 22. Severally , where are both Lawes , c. 23 , 24 , 25. And the close of them , c. 26. II. The confirmation of the Law by certain Arguments , viz. 1. Signes c. 27. 2. Promises and threats . c. 28. 3. By solemn renewing of the Covenant : partly , 1 By word , Comminatory , c. 29. Promissory , c. 30. 2 By writing and instruments , c. 31.

III. Conclusion of the whole book c. 32 , 33 , 34. Which is either , I. Propheticall and Hortatory , wherein is a double Prophecy . 1. Common , touching the Church of the Jewes till the time of the Messiah ▪ c. 32. 2. Speciall , containing the blessing of the 12 Tribes c. 33. 2. Historicall , concerning the death of Moses , c. 34.

IJ. THE PROPHETS .

THe PROPHETS wrote all the Bookes of the Old Testament , besides the Pentateuch of Moses . These Prophets inspired infallibly by the Holy-Spirit of Prophecy , wrote Books of three severall sorts , viz. 1 Historicall , 2 Dogmaticall or Doctrinall , and 3 Propheticall . The Hebrews thus distinguish the Books of the Old Testament . 1. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Thorah i. e. The Law . viz. the five books of Moses . 2. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nebi●m i. e. The Prophets . The Prophets they distinguish into two sorts , viz. 1. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nebiim Rishonim i. e. The former Prophets ; perhaps so called because they treat of the first Prophets , These are foure , viz. Ioshua , Iudges , Samuel and Kings . And 2 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nebiim Acharonim i. e. the later Prophets ; which they reckon up in foure Books also . viz. Isaiah , Ieremiah , Ezekiel , and the twelve minor Prophets which were anciently , joyned all in one volume , lest they through their smalnesse should be lost ; That phrase seemes to favour this , It is written in the Book of the Prophets , Act. 7.42 . the Prophet Amos being cited , which is one of the Minor , or lesser Prophets . 3. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The writings ; by way of emphasis . See the Reason hereof in Rivet . Isag. ad sucr . scrip . c. 29. Sect. 16. The Greek cals these Books , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ; Hagiographa i. e. The holy writings , upon some such ground . Of this sort are eleven in this order in Hebrew , Ruth ; Psalmes ; Iob ; Proverbs ; Ecclesiastes ; Song of Songs ; Lamentations ; Daniel ; Esther ; Ezra ; Chronicles ; under Ezra comprehending Nehemiah , which sometimes is called the second of Ezra , and the two Books of the Chronicles being reckoned as but one Book .

But the former Distribution of the PROPHETS bookes into ¹ Historicall , ² Doctrinall , and 3 Propheticall , ( being both more consonant to the matter of these books , and to the method of our Bibles ) shall here be followed .

I. HISTORICAL BOOKS .

THE HISTORICAL BOOKS of the Prophets Relate the History of the Jewes , and of the Church of God among them , from the death of Moses , which was , when he was one hundred and twenty years old , Deut. 34.7 . Ioseph Ant. l. 4. c. 3. In 2493 year of the world ; Helvic . untill the Period of the Persian Monarchy , possessed by Alexander the Macedonian , called Alexander the great , who conquered the Persians , and got Dominion of Asia , about Ann. 3614 after the worlds Creation , Helvic . in Chronolog . So that these Books contain an History of about 1121 years continuance .

Of this History of the Jews , and of the Church of God , there are two Principall Parts or Periods ; viz. 1. Of the Israelites Entrance into the promised land . 2. Of their Government and Condition , after that entrance .

Joshuah .

1. ISraels entrance into the promised land , is described in the Book of JOSHUAH . So called from the chiefe subject handled therein , viz. The Acts of Ioshuah , the successour of Moses , the Governour and chiefe Captaine of Israel , under whose conduct they conquered the Land ; Divided it by Line and Lot among the Tribes ; and possessed it , according to all Gods faithfull promises in that behalfe unto their Fathers , Josh. 21.43 , 44 , 45. & 23.14 , 15.

Penman of this Booke some conceive to be Ioshuah , because it beares his name . But that Reason is not cogent ; ¹ partly because the Bookes of Iudges , Ruth , and Kings , bear their name , yet not Penned by them : ² partly because the denomination of this Book is rather from the Subject matter , then the Author . Other thinke Eleazer the High-Priest ( whose death is recorded Iosh. 24.33 . Gathered together the chief materials of which this Booke is compiled . It being the Priests duty , to leave upon Record all memorable Ecclesiastical affairs for the benefit of after ages , and propagation of Religion . This more probable : but not certain . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 119. Iohan. Calvin . Argument . in Lib. Iosuae .

This book containes an History of almost eighteene yeeres . viz. From the death of Moses to the death of Joshuah . Iun. Arg. in lib. Iehosh . Gerh. loc. prim . de Scriptura . in exegesi . Sect. 125.

Scope . Of this booke to demonstrate Gods exact faithfulnesse in performing all his Promises made to the Fathers ; that all his people may be encouraged to trust to him the better for ever ▪ Iosh. 21.45 . & 23.14 , 15.

Principall parts .

In this Book is an History of Ioshuah's Life and Death .

I. Of Ioshua's Life . Wherein consider ▪ 1. His vocation . God cals him to be Governour of Israel in Moses stead , c. 1. 2. His Administration , both in time of warre , and Peace . 1. In time of warre , Whereof is laid down ; 1. A Narration . 1. Of sending the Spies to search the Land , c. 2. 2. Of the passing thorow Jordan , where The Antecedent passages and manner of it , c. 3. The Consequents upon it . c. 4.5 . 3. Of the Seiges and Victories ; His first Victory over Jericho , c. 6. The impediment of his proceedings , the Accursed thing , c. 7. His manifold and happy successe after removal of the Accursed thing , he conquered all the Country c. 8 , 9 , 10 , 11. 2. A Repetition of his warlike exploits , &c. c. 12. 2. In time of Peace . Wherein are , 1. The distribution of the land of Canaan , under which are described , 1 The borders of the Land , c. 13. 2 The manner of the distribution , by Lot . c. 14. 3 The parties among whom the Land was divided , viz. The Israelites c 15. to 20. 4 The menslayers , &c. c. 20 5 The Levites c. 21. 2. The dismission and remanding of the Reubenites , Gadites & half tribe of Manasseh to their Lot on the other side Iordan . c. 22 3. The exhortation and charge of Joshuah to the people before his death , c. 23. II. Of Ioshuah's death , and the things immediately Antecedent , and Consequent thereto , c. 24.

II. Israels condition and Government after their entrance into the Promised Land . Which is Historically described , what it was . 1. Before their carrying away into Babylon . 2. During the Captivity . 3. After the Captivity .

I. Before their carrying away into Babylon , and that either under the Iudges , or the Kings .

I. Vnder the Iudges .

And here we have two Histories , viz. One Common and Generall : Another Particular .

Judges

I. THe Common or Generall History , is the Book of IUDGES , so called , not from the Authors of it , but from the subject matter of it , in Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Shophtim , i. e. Iudges .

Penman of this Book the Hebrewes thinke to be Samuel . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 119. O●hers thinke that every Iudge recorded the things acted in his owne dayes respectively : and that Samuel , or Ezra , or Ieremiah , or King Hezekiah , ( whose men copied out some of Solomons Proverbs , Prov. 25.1 . ) collected and digested them into one volume . Hugo Cardinal●s in Prolog . in hunc . lib.

This book containes an History of Israels Politie , and the state thereof from the death of Ioshuah , till the Priesthood of Eli. How during that time Israel oftimes Apostatized from God , for which God delivered them into their enemies hands ; but upon their conversion to him , he saved them by Iudges raised up from among their Tribes , out of their enemies hands . It is an History of about 299 years , which may be thus computed .

From Ioshuah's death , to Othniel's 40 y. Iudg. 3.11 . From Othniel's death to Ehud's and Shamgar's 80 ▪ y. 3.30 . Thence to Deborah's death 40 y. 5 31. Thence to Gideons death-40 y. 8 28 Thence to Abimilech's death 3 y. 9 22. Thence to Tholah's death 23 y. 10 2 Thence to Iair's death 22 y. 10 3 Thence to Iephte's death 6 y. 12 7 Thence to Ibzan's death 7 y. 12 9 Thence to Elon's death 10 y. 12 11 Thence to Abdon's death 8 y. 12 14 Thence to Samson's death-20 y. 16 31

Scope of this book , to shew what happy Haleyonian dayes Gods Church enjoyes under pious magistrates . How severe God is against the sins , especially the idolatry of his own people : and yet how he remembers mercy in midst of severest judgements .

Principall parts . This book being a Glasse discovering Israels calamity , and the cause thereof their sin . Describes their sin ; I. As General , Universal and Common to all the tribes , viz. by the 1. Kinds or sorts of their sinnes . 1. Negligence in driving the Canaanites out of the land . c. 1. 2. Perfidiousnesse , in Apostatizing from God to Idols . c. 2. 2. Effects or fruits of their sinnes . viz. Five severall oppressions by their enemies , i. e. 1. Syrians , c. 3. 2. Canaanites c. 4. and 5. 3. Midianites , where of Gideon's 1. Call . c. 6. 2. Acts Polemical c. 7. and Political . c. 8. 3 Successour , Abimilech c. 9. 4. Ammonites . Here 1. The cause and effect of the oppression , Israels Apostacy and Repentance c. 10. 2. The Remedy . viz. warre undertaken against Ammonites c. 11. Ephraimites . c. 12. 5. Philistines . Sampson being avenger : Samsons Birth c. 13. Prosperity c. 14. adversity c. 15. and death c. 16. are at large delineated . II. As speciall viz. 1. Idolatry , Of one family c. 17. Of the Tribe of Dan c. 18. 2. Lust of uncleannesse , Perpetrated , c. 19. Punished c. 20 , 21.

Ruth

II THe particular History under the Iudges , is the Book of RUTH , so stiled from RUTH the Moabitesse , a Gentile ( Moab being one of the incestuous sons of Lot Gen. 18. ) concerning whom this Book treats , especially of her marriage with Boaz , whose Pedigree , by a Prophetick spirit , is brought down to K. David , Ruth 4.18 . to the end , Ruth bearing to Boaz , Obed ; the Grandfather of David , of whom according to the flesh Christ came , Matth. 1.5 , 6. The Chald. Paraphrast thinks that Ruth was the daughter of Eglon King of Moab , but that is not proved by any Scripture , nor is it likely that a Kings daughter would marry a Stranger , and leave her native Countrey to seek bread in another land , saith Gerh. Augustine refers the time of this History , to the Beginning of the Kings . Aug. l. 2. de Doctrin . Christian . c. 8. Ioseph . l. 5. Antiq. and Hugo Cardinalis referre it to the time of Eli , the Priest . D. Kimchi in c. 1. Ruth . and other of the Rabbines ( as some note ) conceive ; That , Boaz who married Ruth , was that Judge which is called Ibzan Judg. 12.8 . who immediately succeeded Iephte . Iunius and Tremellius comparing this History of Ruth with Matth. 1.5 . are of opinion , that this History fell out in the dayes of Deborah . Annot. in Ruth 1.1 .

But it s certaine it fell out in the time of the Iudges , Ruth 1.1 . though the particular time perhaps cannot so punctually be demonstrated .

Penman of this History is not certainly knowne . Hebrews thinke Samu●l penned it . Alsted . in Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 119.

Many Writers annex this Book of Ruth as an Appendix to the Book of Iudges , as they do the Lamentations , to the Prophecy of Ieremiah . Andr. Rivet . Isag. ad sacr. Script . c. 29. p. 501.

Scope of this Book . To delineate part of the Genealogy of Christ , Ruth 4.18 . &c. compared with Mat. 1.5.6 . And to shew that salvation by Iesus Christ belongs to sinners of the Gentiles , as well as to the Iewes : Christ deriving his line not only from Iewes , but also from Gentiles and sinners , for the raising up of their Hope and Consolation in him .

Principall parts . In this History are described .

1. Ruths Distresse in her widowhood c. 1. 2. Ruths Deliverance from this distresse , which is 1. Inohoate . 1. By her gleaning in Boaz his field with his approbation , c. 2. 2. By her lodging at Boaz his feet in the threshing floor at her mothers appointment , he being a neer Kinsman c. 3. 2. Consummate , By Boaz his marrying of her c. 4.

II. Vnder the Kings .

And here we have three Histories compiled in six books viz. the two Books of Samuel , the two Books of Kings , and the two Books of Chronicles , which Histories set forth the State of the Kingdome of Israel three wayes . viz. 1. As the Kingdome was Vnited of which the two Books of Samuel . 2. As The Kingdome was Divided , of which the two Books of Kings . 3. As the Kingdom was both Vnited and Divided , of which the two Books of Chronicles . As Trelcatius in Oeconomiâ Bibliorum , well observes , : And as the matter of these Histories doth clearly evince .

I. The UNITED State of the Kingdome of Israel , is described what it was , both under the Kings . 1. By Election . and 2. By Succession . And how it increased and flourished whilest so united .

I Samuel

I UNder Kings by ELECTION , The kingdomes Condition is recorded in the I. Book OF SAMUEL . So called , either from the matter or subject herein handled . viz. The History of SAMUEL , which takes up a great part of the Book . As Alsted . in Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 120. Or also from the instrumentall efficient cause , or Penman of this of this Book , Samuel being supposed to have penned this Book , till c. 25. David the rest . Gloss. ordinar. Iunius and Trem. are of opinion , that Samuel had a great share in penning of these two Books that bare his name ; and that Nathan the Prophet , and Gad the Seer penned part thereof , from that intimation , 1 Chron. 29.29 . which words of Samuel , Nathan and Gad seem to be the two Books of Samuel , penned by them three . Iun. in Annot. in 1 Chron. 29.29 . By the Greek and Latin , it is also called the 1. Book of Kings , because the later part of it containes the History of Saul , the first King of Israel .

This history treats of the last Judges , viz. Eli , and Samuel , and of the first King , viz. Saul . Declaring when and upon what occasion the Lord changed the government by Iudges into a Regall government , viz. In days of Samuel , and upon occasion of the extreame wickednesse of both Elye's and Samuels Sons , c. 1. to 9. As also how Saul carryed himselfe both in life and death : and how God prepared David for the Throne , Saul being rejected . It is an history of about 80 yeeres continuance . viz. Under Ely 40 yeeres , 1 Sam. 4.18 . And under Samuel and Saul 40 yeeres , Act. 13.21 .

Scope . To discover mans mutability , but Gods immutability in all the Revolutions and alterations of Families , and Common-wealths : viz. In their Constitution , Administration , and Alteration .

Principall parts .

This booke treats of the affaires of Israel under a double kind of civill Government , I. Aristocraticall under Samuel the Prophet and Judge . Whose , 1. Birth is recorded , c. 1. 2. Calling . Where , of Eli his Predecessour , and of his Sonnes ; whose I. Grievous sinne is recorded , c. 2. II. Severe punishment is , 1 , Foretold by Samuel . c. 3. 2. Inflicted by God . where , of the warre , Acted c. 4. Finished , where we have a descripti●n . 1. Of the Philistines punishment , c. 5. And of their restoring the captivated Ark , c. 6. 2. Of Israels Repentance , c. 7. II. Monarchicall , under a King . 1. To be elected , what a one he was like to be , c. 8. 2. Actually elected , what a one he proved ; evidenced , in Saul , David ▪ 1. Saul , described . 1. As elected , where are laid down his calling , c. 9. Unction , c. 10. Warlike successe , c. 11. 2. As rejected . The causes of which rejection are recited , viz. 1. The peoples sin , c. 12. 2. Sauls unbeliefe , c. 13. Rashnesse in judging , c. 14. And disobedience , c. 15. 2. David . Touching whom are declared , His 1. Election . Where note 1. His call , c. 16. 2. His Preparatory 1 conquest of Goliath c. 17. 2 Advancement into Sauls family , c. 18. 2. Ejection . David being exiled . 1. In his own Country , c. 19 , 20. 2. Out of his Country , c. 21. to 30. 3. Advancement . 1. By his Victory , c. 30. 2. By Saul's Death , c. 31.

II Samuel

II UNder Kings by SUCCESSION . In this respect the Kingdome 's state is declared in the II. of SAMUEL . So called for Reasons formerly mentioned . It s also by the Greek and Latin stiled The second Book of Kings , because therein the History of David the second King of Israel is continued .

This is an History of about 40 yeeres continuance , 2 Sam. 5.5 . An History of Davids Kingdome . may well be called The Annals of David .

Penman ; some thinke to be the High-Priest ; or some Disciple of Samuel , who yet for honours sake gave the Booke his Masters name . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 120. But rather it is probable that the latter part of the I. Of Samuel ; and this whole Booke of the II. Of Samuel , were Penned by Nathan the Prophet , and Gad the Seer . 1 Chron. 29.29 .

Scope . To declare Gods Faithfulnesse in delivering of his own from distresses . That divers great infirmities are incident to Gods uprightest servants . And That ( like checker-worke ) their prosperity is intermingled with crosses and calamities .

Principal Parts . In this Booke ; ( which is a description of Davids Kingdome ) we have a Narration of Davids 1 Life and 2 Death .

I. Davids Life is represented as it was 1 Glorious ; and as it was 2 Ignominious . 1. As it was Glorious in his Royall inauguration . Where consider things , 1. Antecedent viz. 1. His mourning for Sauls death , c. 1. 2. His returne into Judea , c. 2. 3. His war with the House of Saul , c. 3.4 . 2. Concomitant . He is confirmed King by all Israel , c. 5. 3. Consequent , viz. 1. Ecclesiasticall , as His fetching up the Ark to Sion c. 6. His purpose of building God an House , c. 7. 2. Polemicall or warlike , c. 8. 3. Politicall , or civil , c. 9 , 10. 2. As it was Ignominious ; and that 1. By his sins , Adultery and Murder , committed c. 11. corrected c. 12. 2. By his sorrowes . 1. Private , 1. In Amnon , by his Incest , c. 13. 2. In Absolom , where are declared , his Restitution , c. 14. His Sedition begun c. 15. Continued c. 16. Concluded , c. 17 , 18 , 19. 2. Publique . 1. Sedition of the people , c. 20. 2. Famine three yeeres , c. 21. II. Davids death . Occurrents Antecedent thereunto . 1. His gratulatory and laudatory Psalme , c. 22 ▪ 2 , His sweet Swanlike Song , and Testament , c. 23. 3. The Pestilence upon his numbring the people , c. 24.

II. The DIVIDED state of the Kingdome of Israel , and how upon that division it decreased and came to ruine , is laid down in the two Books of Kings .

This d●vision and decay of the Kingdome is laid downe two wayes . 1. According to the causes and Beginnings thereof . 2. According to the Progresse thereof .

I Kings

I. ACcording to the causes , and first beginnings of this Division and decay thereupon ensuing . These are set forth in the I. of KINGS . This book is stiled in 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 1. Melacim . i. e. 1. Of Kings . By the Greek and Latine the III. of Kings . The history of the Kings both of Iudah and Israel , being the subject matter of the book .

In this book the causes and first beginnings of the Kingdomes division and decay are laid downe , partly by way of Opposition of the flourishing state of Davids kingdome united under Solomon , c. 1. to c. 11. Partly by way of Exposition of the occasions ( viz. Solomons sinnes , Gods justice , Solomons death , c. 11. ) and of the first beginnings of the division and decay of the kingdome under Rehoboam , to whom onely two Tribes were left subject , Iudah and Benjamin , 1 King . 11.21 . And under Ieroboam to whom the other tenne Tribes revolted : and afterwards under their successours severally . So that in this book are the Acts of five Kings of Iudah after Solomon , viz. Rehoboam , ●bijam , Asa , Iehoshaphat , Iehoram : and of eight Kings of Israel , viz. Ieroboam , Nadab , Baasha , Elah , Zimri , Omri and Tibni , Ahab , Ahaziah .

This is an history of 118. yeeres viz. Under Solomon 40 yeeres , 1 King . 11.42 . Under the rest of Kings of Iudah , 78. yeeres , for Rehoboam Reigned 17 yeeres . 1 King . 17.31 . — Ab●jam 3 yeeres . 1 King . 15.2 . — Asa , 41. yeeres . 1 King . 15.10 . — Iehoshaphat , 17. yeers . 1 King . 22.51 . — In all 118 yeeres .

Penman of this book , and also of the second booke of Kings is conceived not to be any one man , but divers . Though the Hebrewes would have them to be written by Ieremiah . Others think that the Churches history , which was written by divers , was digested and collected into volumes , either by E●ra ; Gerh. loc. Com. 1 de Scriptura . in Exegesi . § . 129. Or by the chiefe Priests and Prophets as the Churches Pub. Actuari●s . Alsted Proecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 120. However , it seemes evident , that the beginning of 1. of Kings , touching Solomons Reign , was written by Nathan , Abijah and Iddo , 2 Chron. 9.29 . See Iun. in loc. And other parts by Iehu son of Canani , 2 Chron. 20.3 . See Iun. Annot ▪ ibid. And by the Prophet Isaiah , ( as Iunius thinks ▪ ) partly in his Prophecy , par●ly in the Book of Kings , 2 Chron. 26.22 .

Scope . To shew how the Piety of Kings , preserves their kingdomes in unity , and flourishing Prosperity : But the sins and wickednesse of Kings , especially their idolatry , whereby they divide themselves from God , brings Divisions into their Kingdomes , and consequently ruine upon themselves , their families and Dominions .

Principall parts , might be pointed out , according to the periods of every severall Kings reigne , but rather thus . This book containes the increase and decrease of the kingdome of Israel .

I. Increase of the Kingdome under Solomon ; whose Life and Death are recorded . 1. Solomons Life . Therein consider his 1. Election , c. 1 , 2. 2. Administration or Government of the Kingd●m , where note 1. His great Prudence , c. 3 , 4. 2. His Magnificence in Building , The Temple , c. 5 , 6 , 8. His own house , In Lebanon , c. 7. The Kings house more publique , c. 9. 3. His condition , Prosperous , c. 10. Adverse , c. 11. 2. Solomons death , c. 11. II. Decrease of the Kingdom once Divided ; and this under 1. The Kings of Iudah 1. Rehoboam , c. 12 , 14. 2. Abijah , c ▪ 15.3 . Asa , c. 15. 4. Iehoshaphat . c , 22. 5 Iehoram , c. 22. ver. 50. 2. The Kings of Israel contemporary to the Kings of Iudah , viz. 1. Ieroboam c. 12 , 13 , 14. 2 Nadab , c. 15. 3. Baasha , c. 16.4 . Elah , 5. Zimri 6. Omri , c. 16.7 . Ahab . 1 whose stock is recorded , c. 16. from ver . 28. 2 Whose prosperous state is declared , In respect of Elijahs Presence . Here are considered , Elijah's Ambassadge to the King , c. 17 , 18. Elijah's exile , c. 19. In respect of Ahabs double victory , c. 20. 3 Whose Acts and manners are described , c. 21. 4 Whose Death is delineated , c. 22. 8. Ahaziah , c. 22. ver. 51. &c.

II Kings

2. ACcording to the Progresse and Growth of the Kingdom 's division , and the miserable calamities , growing and increasing thereupon , This is related in the 11. of KINGS called in Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 11. Melacim , i. c. The second of Kings , By the Greek and Latin , The IV. of Kings . The History of the Kings being still continued in this Book .

This Book is an History of about 320. years , under 12. Kings of Israel , and 16. Kings of Iudah .

Vnder 12. Kings of Israel , 162 years . Ahazia 1 yeare . 1 Kings 22.52 . Ioram 11 yeare . 2 Kings 3.1 . & 8.25 . Iehu 28 yeare . 2 Kings 10.36 . Iehoahaz 17 yeare . viz. 15 alone , and two with his son , 2 Kings 13.1.10 . Ioash 16 yeare . 2 Kings 13.10 . Ieroboam 41 yeare . 2 Kings 14.23 . Zechariah 6 moneths 2 Kings 15.8 . Shallum 1 moneth 2 Kings 15.13 . Menachem 10 yeare . 2 Kings 15.17 . Pekachijah 2 year . 2 Kings 15.23 . Pekah 20 year . 2 Kings 15.27 . Hosheah who reigned 18 y. viz. 9 y. free . 2 Kings 17.1 . and 9. y. a tributary to the King of Assyria , by whom at last he was carried captive , ver. 6. Vnder 16 Kings of Iudah , 320 year . Iehoram 12 y. viz. 8. alone , and 4. with his father Iehoshaphat 2 Kings 8.17 . Ahazia 1. y. 2 King . 8.26 . Athalia 6 year , 2 Kings 11.3 . Ioash 40. y. 2 King . 12.1.39 . Iunius . Amaziah 29 yeare 12 of which in exile , — 2 Kings 14.2 . Azariah or Vzziah 52. yeare . 2 Kings — 15 , 5. Iotham 16. yeare . 2 King 15.33 . — 15. yeare Iun. Ahaz 16. yeare , 2 Kings 16.2 . — 14. year Iun. Hezekiah 29. year , 2 King . 18.2 . Manasses 55. yeare , 2 King . 21.2 . Ammon 2 yeare , 2 Kings 21.19 . Iosiah 31. yeare . 2 King . 22.1 . Ioahaz 3. moneths . 2 Kings 23.36 . Ichoiakim 11 yeare , 2 Kings 23.36 . Ichoiachin three moneths . 2 Kings 24.8 Zedekiah 11. year , 2 Kings 24.18 . Thence till Iehoiakins advancement , 26. year , 2 Kings 25.27 , 30.

Penmen of this 11. of Kings , See in Penmen of 1. of Kings .

Scope ; to delineate Gods verity in his Promises and Threats , together with his severity in his judgements . The continuall Revolution of Families and States , The mischief of sin , especially in Magistrates , dividing them and their people from God , and consequently themselves amongst themselves , till both Kings , people and Kingdomes be ripe and ready for desolation .

Principall parts , may be considered either according to the Reign of the severall Kings of Israel and Iudah , as afore . Or as followeth ; This Book declareth .

The state of the Kingdomes of Israel and Iudah ; together with their defection and declining , 1. Severally of the Kingdome of Israel under 1. Ahaziah , c. 1.2 . 2. Ioram , where of Elishah's miracles , c. 3.4.5 . Oracles or Prophecies , c , 6.7.8 . 2. Joyntly of Israel and Iudah , parallel'd as it were together , c. 9. to 18. 3 Severally of the Kingdome of Iudah , whose 1. Weakning , is recorded 1. Under a good King Hezekiah , c. 18. 19.20 . 2. Under a bad King Manasseh , c. 20.21 . 2. Reparation is indeavoured by Iosiah , c. 22.23 . 3. Subversion is 1. Begun c. 23. 24. 2. Accomplished c. 25.

III. The UNITED and DIVIDED State of the kingdome is laid downe in the two Books of Chronicles , with some further Additions and Amplifications to the former Histories . This is done two wayes .

I Chron.

1. ACording to the UNITED State of the kingdome in I. OF CHRONICLES , so called because the Acts of former times are herein Recorded , or Chronicled . In Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Dihre Haijamim , i. e. THE WORDS OF DAYES , because they are as a Sacred DIARY ; reporting the Acts and Occurrents in the Church of God , and Civil States both Domestique and Forrein . Munsterus not unfitly stiles them Libros Annalium , i. e. The Books of Annals . Annals barely declaring matters of fact for divers years in order ; as , Gellius notes l. 5. N. A. c. 18. These two Books are the CHVRCHES ANNALS . In Greek these two Books are called 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , Bibloi Paralipomenon , i. e. The Books of things omitted : or , THE BOOKS OF REMAINES : because some things omitted , or not fully described in the Pentateuch , Ioshuah , Iudges , Ruth , Samuel and Kings , are here Summarily explicated , and supplyed .

This I. of Chron. Principally insists upon the History of David , Relating his Genealogy from the first Adam and so forwards towards the second Adam ; wherein the 12. tribes and their families , &c. are recorded c. 1. to 10. And his famous Acts c. 10. to the end of the Book ; so that this Book is a Compendious Chronology of all the former Books to the Books of Kings , of things from the worlds Creation , till about the yeare 2985. viz. of Genesis — 2368 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . Exodus 142. y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . The other Books of Moses 39 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . Joshuah 17. almost 18 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . Judges — 299 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . I. Of Samuel 80 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible . II. Of Samuel 40 y. All which have been aboue particularly explained and demonstrated . So the I. of Chronicles is the longest History of any one Book in the whole Bible .

Hierom calls the Chronicles , Instrumenti veteris Epitomen , &c. The Epitome of the Old Testament ; and that it is of such Consequence , that whosoever would arrogate to himselfe the knowledge of the Scriptures without it , doth but mock and abuse himselfe . Hieronym . in Ep. ad Paulin. And again stiles it , Totius divinae Historiae 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. The Chronicle of the whole Divine History . Hier. in Prolog . Galeat .

Penman of this and the second Book is uncertaine . R. Salomo . R. D. Kimchi , think it was Ezra . Saith Alsted in Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 120. Iunius also is of the same judgement . Iun. Annot. in 1 King . 11.41 . and in his argument before 1 Chron. The Argument that generally inclines them all to this opinion , is , That the same words which are used in the close of the Chronicles 2 Chron. 36.23 . are also used in the beginning of Ezra . Ezr. 1.1 , 2 , 3.

Scope . The primary Scope of this Book seemes to be this ; Clearly to describe the Line and Genealogy of CHRIST , the Messiah promised to David , Abraham , and Adam : That when in fulnesse of time Christ should be revealed and performed ; the Church might infallibly know , that he was the Promised SEED OF THE WOMAN .

Principall Parts . This first Book of Chron. describes the Israelitish kingdome in its 1 Foundation , and 2 Administration .

I. Foundation . Where , of 1. The General Genealogy of all Nations from Adam to Iacob , c. 1. Here is a Chronicle of 1 The Pentateuch . 2 Ioshuah . 3. Iudges . 2. Particular Geneal of the Nation of Israel by the twelve Tribes , c. 2. to 9. Here is a Chronicle of 1 The Pentateuch . 2 Ioshuah . 3. Iudges . II. Administrat●on under . 1 Saul , whose 1 Genealogy is in c. 9. 2 Death c. 10. 2 David whose 1. Kingly condition , c. 11 , 12 , 14. 2 Acts 1 Sacred , restoring Gods ●orship , in respect of the 1 Place , c. 13 , 15 , 17 , 22. 2 Persons ministring in the 1 Tabernacle c. 16 2 Temple , c. 23. 24 , 25 , 26 Here is a Chronicle of the two Books of Samuel . 2 Polemical or Martial , c. 18 , 19 , 20. 3. Political , c. 21.27 . 3. Death , c. 28 , 29. where is declared how David before his Death in a Solemne Assembly at Ierusalem took his leave of his Kindred . Set Solomon or his Throne , after he had given him Directions about the Temple , and himself with his Princes had offered willingly towards the building of it .

II Chron:

2. ACcording to the UNITED and DIVIDED state of the kingdom in the II of CHRONICLES . So called for the reasons formerly alledged .

This booke relates the history of the Israelitish State from the beginning of king Solomons Reigne , till their returne from the Babylonish Captivity , which fell out about the first yeare of Cyrus king of Persians . Setting down both the union and flourishing condition of the kingdome , under Solomon . but the division and decay of the kingdome thence ensuing , till it came to utter ruine . So this book contains an History of about 472 yeeres .

From Solomon to carrying away of Iechonias , 401. As Jun. and Tremell . compute . In the Captivity , — 70 As Jun. and Tremell . compute . Under Cyrus the Persian , — 1. As Jun. and Tremell . compute .

So that this book is an Epitome or Chronicle of the two Books of Kings , with Additions . If we consider the books of Samuel , Kings , and Chronicles , all together , they containe an Historicall Narration , How the kingdome of Israel 1 Began under Samuel : 2 Increased under David : 3 Flourished under Solomon : and 4 Failed under Zedekiah ; thus it endured almost 565 yeers .

Penman , see in 1. of Chron.

Scope , For substance the same with that of the two books of Kings .

Principall parts .

This book containes an Historicall Narration of the kingdome of Israel's , I. Flourishing , or increase under King Solomon . Touching Solomon are recorded , his 1. Vertues , c. 1. 2. Buildings . 1. Sacred , viz. The Temple , where , 1. His preparation for it , c 2. 2. His extruction or building of it , viz. Of the Temple , contayning ▪ c. 3. And of the Holy utensils , contayned in it , c. 4. 3. His Dedication of the Temple , partly by Dedicated things , especially the Arke brought into the Temple c. 5. Partly by praise and prayer , c. 6. Partly by Sacrifice , c. 7. 2. Civil , viz. Severall Cities which he builded , c. 8. 3. Condition and Death , c. 9. II. Fading , or decrease under the following Kings of Iudah and Israel ( the kingdome being divided ) till the returne from Captivity in the Reigne of Cyrus . Where note five concussions of shakings of the Kingdome under these ensuing Kings . viz. Rehoboam , c. 10 , 11 , 12 Abia , c. 13 Asa , c. 14 , 15 , 16 Jehoshaphat , c. 17 , 18 , 19 , 20 Jehoram , c. 21 Ahaziah , c. 22 Joash , c. 23 , 24 Amaziah , c. 25 Uzziah , c. 26 Jotham , c. 27 Ahaz , c. 28 Hezekiah , c. 29 , 30 , 31 , 32 Manas●eh , c. 33 Amon , c. 33 Josi●h , c. 34 , 35 Joahaz , c. 36. Jehoakim , c. 36. Jechoniah , c. 36. Zedekiah , c. 36.

II. After the people of Israels CAPTIVITY in which regard we have their REDUCTION , or bringing back from the Captivity of Babylon Hystorically declared : And that two wayes . 1. According to the truth and manner of it . 2. According to the fruit and event of it .

Ezra .

1 THe truth and manner of Gods peoples RETURNE FROM BABYLON , is contained in the book of EZRA . So called from Ezra the Penman of it ; whose Acts also are the chief subject-matter of it . Some count and call Ezra a Prophet . Lactant. lib. 4. Iust. c. 11. but Augustine doubts whether he may be called a Prophet , Aug. l. 18 de Civit . Dei c. 36. Hierome saith he was Iosedech , whose son was Iesus the High-Priest . See Ludovic . Viv. in Lib. 18 de Civit. dei . c. 36. But how can he be denyed to be a Prophet , when Christ himselfe stiles all the books of the Old Testament Moses and the Prophets , Luk. 16.29.31 ?

This is certaine , Ezra was a Priest , Ezr. 7 , 11 , 12. He was of the house and linage of Aaron ; see his pedigree , Ezr. 7.1.2 , 3 , 4 , 5. A most expert and ready Scribe in the Law of Moses , Ezr. 7.6 , 10 , 11. He was sent with Commission by Artaxerxes from Babylon to Ierusalem , &c. ver. 11. &c.

Zerubbabel restored the Temple : Ezra the worship of God : Nehemiah the City Ierusalem .

This book , and that of Nehemiah following , are by the Hebrewes , reputed as but one volume , and that is called by them the I. of Ezra , this the II. of Ezra . Hieronym . in Epist. ad Paulin. and Lactant. Instit. l. 4. c. 11. The Greek and Latin divide them ( as our English ) into two books , the former being ascribed to Ezra , the latter to Nehemiah . The Book of Ezra , in Order well followes the Chronicles ; for the very words which conclude the Chronicles , 2 Chron. 36. last , do begin this Book of Ezra , Ezra 1.1 , 2 , 3. not only intimating , that Ezra was probably Penman of them both , but also that in this Book the History is continued . In Ezra is declared the Iewes returne from Babylon . And it is an History for about 146. years , viz. From the Edict of Cyrus , to the nineteenth year of Artaxerxes Mnemon . As Iunius computes , of Cyrus and Cambyses 9 Magi 1 Darius Histaspis 36 Xerxes 22 Artaxerxes Longimanus 40 Darius Nothus 19 Artaxerxes Mnemon 19

Scope . To evidence how punctually faithfull and alsufficiently able God is , in performing of his Promises to his Church and people in their season , touching their deliverance and Restauration , against all impediments , improbabilities and seeming impossibilities . For he made Cyrus an heathen King his shepheard , and nursing father to his Church , to bring them out of Babylon , wherein they were as helplesse and hopelesse , as dead bodies or dry bones in a grave . Ezek. 37. 2 , 3 , 11 , 12 , 13. To build the Temple and Ierusalem , Isa. 44. 28. and 45. 1. &c. compared with Ezra 1.1 , 2. &c.

Principall parts . In this Book are laid downe , touching the Jewes returne , 1. The causes of their return from Babylon , viz. 1. Instrumentall , Cyrus his Grant , c. 1. 2. Materiall , Persons returning , c. 2. 3. Finall , the Restauration of the Temple , and worship of God , c. 3. 2. The Impediments of their Returne , 1. Recited , viz. The Samaritanes . c. 4. and the Ruler of Canaan , c. 5. 2. Removed , by the Renewing of Cyrus his Edict , c. 6. 3. The successe of their Returne , where are described , 1 Ezra's Commission , c. 7. 2. His execution of his Commission , c. 8. 3. The Reformation of mixed marriages , which are Described , c. 9. Abolished , c. 10.

Nehemia :

II. THe Fruit and Event of the Jews RETURNE FROM BABYLON , is laid down in the Book of NEHEMIAH . So called , 1 partly because Nehemiah was Pen-man of it , Neh. 1.1 . 2 Partly because the Acts of Nehemiah are the Principall subject-matter of the Book , Nehemiah being the great Repairer & Restorer of the holy City Ierusalem . It is by some called the II. of Ezra ; because the History begun by Ezra touching the Iewes returne from Babylon is here continued . Nehemiah is supposed to aeb the same who is called the Tirshatha Ezr. 2.63 . So Munsterus . Neh. 8.9 . which signifies , a Cup-bearer , Gerh. exeg . in loc. 1. de Scrip. § . 132. but in the Chaldee tongue is a Title of Dignity and Honour . R. Aben Ezra . saith Gerh. Translated Legatus Regis ; i. e. The Kings legate , Ambassadour or Commissary . by Iun. & Trem. ( who yet interpret this rather of Shazbazzar , whom many think to be Zerubbabel : ) In the margin of our English Bibles it is rendred , Governour . He was the son of Hachaliah , Neh. 1.1 . and Cup-bearer to King Artaxerxes , in the twentieth yeare of his Reigne , Neh. ● . 11 . and 2.1 . The kings Palace was at Shushan , Neh. 1.1 . that being the Metropolis of Persia , which Darius Hystaspis built . Plin. N. H. l. 6 c. 27.

In this Book are declared the happy fruits of the Jews returne both in reference to the Politique and Ecclesiastick state . It contains an History of about 55 years , as Gerh. Loc. Com. Supradict. & Iunius in Annot. shew . viz.

From the twentieth yeare of Artaerxes Mnemon Neh. 2.1 . 24 Thence of Darius Ochus 23 Thence of Asrenes 3 Thence of Darius the last 5

Scope , To let us know how deep and desperate the distresses of the Church may grow , before God will restore her . How difficult , slow and perplexed a work the work of Reformation is , both by reason of adversaries to be opposed , and Publick corruptions to be removed . How easily and wonderfully God can bring Reformation to perfection against all impediments whatsoever , when he is resolved to carry it on . What excellent and usefull instruments , pious and faithfull Magistrates are for the accomplishing both of Civil and Ecclesiasticall Reformation ; Nehemiah being a lively Patterne of a true Reformer indeed .

Principall parts . This Book sets forth the Restauration of Hierusalem , and this By.

I. Reparation of the wals , gates and buildings where consider 1. The cause of it . 1. Principall God ▪ c. 1. 2. Instrumentall , Nehemiah , c. 2. 2. The work it selfe . 1. Begun . c. 3. 2. Hindred by impediments ; Externall . c. 4. Internall . c. 5. Mixt c. 6. 3. Perfected . c. 6. II. Reformation both of the state Politick and Ecclesiastick , c. 7. to 13. Hereunto appertain . 1. The Custody of the City . The Number of the Captives that returned , ( viz. 49942. Neh. 7.66.67 . ) and the Oblation c. 7. 2. A Description of two Festivals . c. 8. 3. The peoples publick repentance in a Solemne Fast , testified by a Solemne Covenant made and subscribed for Reformation c. 9 , 10. 4. The inhabitants of Ierusalem , viz. Rulers , Voluntiers , and men chosen by lot . c. 11. 5. The number and offices of the Priests : with the Dedication of the wals of Ierusalem , c. 12. III. Correction of such corruptions and miscarriages , as had risen in Iudea , in Nehemiah's absence ▪ c. 13.

Esther .

III. VNder the IEWES CAPTIVITY in Babylon , and other places out of Iudea ; The condition of the Church is described in the Book of ESTHER ; stiled by the Hebrewes 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 megillath Esther , i. e. The volume of Esther , so denominated from Esther the Queen a Iewesh , whose faithfull service , done for the oppressed Church and people of God in extremity of straits , is the primary subject of this Book . Some writers exclude this Book out of the Canon of Scripture , as Melito in Eusebius , lib. 4. c. 25. Athan●sius in Synopsi . and Nazianzen . in Carm. de Script . But the Hebrews and primitive Christians with other writers unanimously receive it as part of the Canon .

Penman is not so unanimously determined upon among Authors . Some thinks it was written by the men of the great Synagogue . R. Moses is said to be of this opinion . Or by Ioachim the Priest , sonne of Iesus the High-Priest . Philo Iudeus in Chronol . Or , by Mordecay , as is conjectured partly from chap. 9.20 , 23. As The Latin Fathers . The ground of whose conjecture seemes to come short . Or by Ezra or Nehemiah , who wrote the two former Histories of the Church of like Nature . Isidorus . Alsted . Praecog . Theol l. c. c. 120. But Eusebius in his Chronicles , supposeth that the Penman was after Ezra .

This Book containes an History of the Church under the Reigne of Ahashuerus King of Persia , from the third yeare of his Reigne , Esth. 1.1 , 2 , 3. till the end of his Reigne , viz. about 20. years ( for he reigned in all about 21. or 22. years ) This Ahashuerus is conceived to be Xerxes sonne of Hystaspis , Ezr. 4.6 . Iun. Annot.

The time of this History is thus computed .

Ahashuerus makes his feast in his third yeare , — Esth. 1.3 .

Marrieth Esther , in his seventh yeare , Esth. 2.16 .

Haman conspires against the Iewes , and is hanged , in his twelfth yeare , Esth. 3.7 . and 7.10 .

Thence Esther reigns till the end of his Reigne , Mordecai being chief Governour , 10. y. Helvic . chron .

S●ope , most lively to manifest ; How singularly vigilant God is over his Church in extreamest straits and deepest dangers ; not only to preserve her from them , and advantage her by them ; but also to returne the plots of her cruell enemies upon their own heads , when they are nearest execution .

Principall parts . This Book declares the Jewes deliverance from Hamans plot , both by what meanes and in what manner it was delivered .

I. Meanes of deliverance , Esther advanced . Of whose advancement , here 's 1. The occasion c. 1. 2. The manner of it . c. 2. II. The manner of the deliverance , where are laid downe 1. Hamans cruell Plot against the Jewes . c. 3. 2. The perill ensuing upon this Plot , 1. Generally to all the Jewes . c. 4. 2. Particularly to Mordecai himselfe . c. 5. 3. Gods countermining of Hamans undermining designe . 1. By advancement of Mordecai . c. 6. 2. By ruining of , 1 Haman . c. 7. 2 Of the rest of the Jewes enemies . whose slaughter was Impetrated , c. 8. Perpetrated . c. 9. 3. By producing out of all an happy , prosperous quiet condition to his owne people .

II. DOCTRINAL BOOKS .

The DOGMATICAL , or DOCTRINALL Books . Thus farre of those Books which are more properly Historicall ; Now of the Bookes which were written in the same times with the former , which declare to us the will of God in a more Doctrinall way , and therefore for distinction sake called , DOCTRINALL . They are also called the Poeticall Books , because it is conceived that they , or most of them in Hebrew were written in Metre , or Poeticall Measures ; which now are not so easie to be found out .

These DOGMATICALL Books containe in them Doctrines . 1. Of more speciall and particular reference to some particular individuall person . 2. Or of more Generall reference and respect to all .

Job .

1. DOctrines of more speciall reference to a particular person ▪ are laid down in the Book of IOB . so called , because that precious man Iob and his various condition is the chiefe subject-matter of the Booke . Some think that there never was such a man in the world as this Iob of which this Book speaks : but account this booke rather Parabolicall , then Historicall . R. Moses Ben. Maimon in more Nebuchim part 3. § . 22. And Thalmud Ord. 4. Tract . 3. But this dreame is sufficiently refelled by that honourable mention that is made of this renowned Iob in other Scriptures both in Old and New Testament Ezek. 14.14 , 20. Iam. 5.11 .

Who this Iob was , is more doubted .

1. Some thinke that Iob came of Nahor Abrahams brother , and that he was the third from Nahor : thus ; Nahor — Vz — rIob ; and that he lived about that time that Israel was in Egypt . Alsted . Chron. p. 100 and p. 115. and p. 502. And Hieronym . in Q. Hebr. Tom. 4. fol. 96. Seemes to incline hereunto , especially , seeing Iob is said to dwell in the Land of Vz , Iob 1.1 . and Vz was one of Nahors sonnes , Gent 22. ●1 . But that Land seems not to have received its name of Vz coetaneous to Abraham ; but rather from Vz son of Aram , Sem's Nephew presently after the flood , Gen. 10.23 . As Gerh. well notes , in exegesi . loc ▪ Com. de Scrip. § . 136.

2. Others rather are of opinion , that Iob is the same which Iobab King of the Idumeans , of the race of Esau Gen. 36.34 . And that 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 might be changed into 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ; the name Iobab into Iob ; either from the custome of the Hebrew tongue , which oft-times changeth one letter for another ; or from the Aramick , Idumean , or other dialect of the Country where he sojourned ; or from the change of his condition in the world ; while prosperous he might be called Iobab , the letter being doubled ; when in distresse his name contracted into Iob. See the like in case of Abraham , Gen. 17.5 . Of Naomi , Ruth 1.20 .

This latter opinion is urged by Arguments not to be neglected . 1. From the circumstances of place . Iobab lived in the Land of Idumea , Gen. 36.33 . Iob in the Land of Vz , a chiefe tract in Idumea , Iob 1.1 . Lam. 4.21 . Hence Kings of Edom are called Kings of the Land of Vz , Ier. 25.20 . 2. From description of their possessions , Iobab had Regall Majesty Gen. 36.33 . Iob had a Princely state , not usuall to private men , Iob 1.1 , 2 , 3. And also Princely Dignity , Habit , and Office , Iob 29.9 , 12 , 14. 3. From Similitude of names . As Moses reckons up among Esau's sons , one Eliphaz who brought forth one Theman builder of a Town of his own name , Gen. 36.10 , 15. So Iobs History mentions , Eliphaz the Temanite Iob 2.11 . Many Authors , as the LXX interpret . at the end of Iob. Euseb. demonstr. Evangel. l. 1. c. 5. Ambros. in Com. in Rom. 9. August . de Civit. dei , l. 18. c. 47. Gerh. quo supr . § 134. vid. Mercer . in Praefat in Lib ▪ Iob & Com. in Iob 1.1

Penman of this book is not certainly known . Some think it was Solomon ; but that 's scarce probable , Iob living so long before Solomon , and many Penmen of Holy Scripture intervening betwixt them . Some that Iob penned this book himselfe , because the expressions and speeches of Iob are laid down in such emphaticall and patheticall terms . Some rather thinke that Moses wrote Genesis and Iob about the same time , viz. a little before Israels departure out of Aegypt , in the yeare of the world , 2452. Alsted . Chron. p. 100. R. Solomon , and other Hebrewes favour this opinion .

Scope , To evidence as in a mirrour the wise , just and fatherly Providence of God to his own faithfull and upright servants , even in midst of manifold , deepest , strangest and longest afflictions . Hebrewes say , Iob's calamity lasted 12 moneths . Suidas saith , seaven yeeres .

Principal Parts . In this book Iobs threefold condition is described viz. His Prosperity , His Adversity , and his recovery out of all his distresses .

I. Iobs Prosperity , is described c. 1.1 , to ver. 6. II. Iobs Adversity , is deciphered to us . 1. By the Occasion , variety and extremity of it , c. 1. ver. 6. to chap. 3.1 . 2. By the distemper of his spirit under the extremity of his dolours , c. 3. 3. By the Dialogue had under his Affliction , wherein this Q. is for substance fully discussed , Whether strange , heavy , and long afflictions be infallible signes either of Gods hatred , or of afflicted persons Hypocrisy ? Likewise Jobs Faith , patience , courage , perseverance and commendable deportment is interwoven in the Dialogue ; though now and then he discovered some infirmities . Here consider the dispute betwixt Iob and his three friends and the Moderatours of the Dispute . 1. The Dispute hath in it 8 severall Acts. 1. Eliphaz his first reproofe c. 4.5 . And Iobs Answer , c. 6 , 7. 2. Bildads first reproofe of Iob , c. 8. And Iobs answer , c. 9 , 10. 3. Zophar's first rebuke c. 11. With Iobs answer , c. 12 , 13 , 14. 4. Eliphaz his second reproofe , c. 15. And Iobs defence , c. 16 , 17. 5. Bildad's second rebuke , c. ●8 . Iobs answer , c. 19. 6. Zophar's second reproofe , c. 20. Iobs answer c. 21. 7. Elephaz his third reproofe , c. 22. Iobs answer , c. 23 , 24. 8. Bildad's third reproofe , c. 25. Iobs answer by shewing Gods Majesty , c. 26 , 27 , 28. and by paralleling his present calamity with his former felicity , c. 29 , 30 , 31. 2. The Moderatours in this dispute are , 1. Elihu ; who first reproves Iobs friends , c. 32. Iob himselfe c. 33. 2. Renders the Reasons of his reproofe drawn from the Majesty of God , c. 34. 3. Exhorts Iob to Repentance , c. 35. 4. Returnes to the description of Gods Majesty , c. 36 , 37. 2. God himselfe who reprehends and convinceth Job of ignorance , and infirmity , by Arguments drawn from the Creation and Gubernation . 1. Of the Meteors c. 38. 2. Of other creatures , especially of the more considerable creatures , viz. The Lyon , c. 39. Elephant , c. 40. Whale , c. 41. III. Iobs recovery out of his adversity , described . 1. By his preparative to it , viz. Iobs penitentiall confession of his sin , &c. This was the sweet fruit of the Dialogue with Iob. 2. By the manner of his Restitution &c. c. 42.

2. Doctrines of more generall reference unto all sorts of persons , are contained partly in Davids , partly in Solomons Books , whereof some were written originally in prose , others in Metre , Trelcat . in Oecon. Bibl.

Psalmes .

1. IN Davids Book viz. That which was ( if not wholly , as some thinke , August . de Civitat . Dei , l. 17. c. 14. Yet ) principally Penned by David , i. e. THE BOOK OF PSALMES . It is called in Hebrew , by the latter Hebrewes ( who gave names or Titles to Books , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sepher Tehillim . i. e. The Book of Hymnes , or Prayses : because the Divine Praises of God are the chiefe subject-matter of the Psalmes . In the Old Testament , THE PSALMS OF ISRAEL 2 Sam. 23.1 . Because penned for the use of the Israel of God . In the New Testament , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 The PSALMES Luk 24.44 . And 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The BIBLE or BOOK OF PSALMES , Luk. 20.42 . Act. 1.20 . Because the Psalmes are digested into one volume . The Greeke cals it also 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The Psalter ; from the Psaltery a musicall instrument , used in singing of the psalmes . Anciently it was called Soliloquium i. e. The Soliloquy ; because it containes the Saints sweetest and secret talkings with God in prayers and prayses , and Gods with them in precious returnes . Parva Biblia , & Summarium V. Test. i. e. The little Bible , and the Summary of the Old Testament . Luth Totius Scripturae Epitome . i. e. The Epitome of the whole Scriptures . Athanas. in Epist. ad Marcel . It is a compendium of all divinity , a common shop of Medicines for the soule , an universall store-house of good Doctrines profitable to every one in all conditions . Basil in Psal. 1. By August . lib. Psalmorū Prol. it s call'd Tutela pueris , juvenibus ornamentum , solatium senibus , mulieribus aptissimus decor . i. e. A safeguard for children , an Ornament to youth , a solace to aged men , and the fittest comelinesse for women . The psalmes are a Iewel made up of the Gold of Doctrine , of the pearles of comfort , of the Gemmes of prayer . This book is a Theater of Gods works . A sweet field and Rosary of promises . A Paradise of sweet fruits and heavenly delights . An ample Sea wherein tempest-tossed soules find richest pearles of consolation . An heavenly schoole wherein God himself is chiefe instructer . The abridgment , flower and quintessence of Scriptures . A glasse of divine grace , representing to us the sweetest smiling fatherly countenance of God in Christ . And a most accurate Anatomie of a Christian soule , delineating all its affections , motions , temptations , plunges with their proper remedies . Incipientibus primum efficitur elementum , proficientibus incremen●um , perfectis stabile firmamentum , totius Ecclesiae vox una . i. e. It is rudiment for the young , increase for the proficient , firm establishment for the perfect , it s as but one voice of the whole Church . August . ibid.

In a word , Quid est quod non discatur in Psalmis ? Non omnis magnitudo virtutis , non norma justitiae , non pudicitiae decor , non prudentiae consummatio , non patientiae regula , non omne quicquid potest dici bonum procedit ex ipsis ? Dei scientia , perfecta praenunciatio Christi in carne venturi , & communis resurrectionis spes , suppliciorum metus , gloriae pollicitatio , mysteriorum revelatio . Omnia prorsus in his velut magno quodam & communi thesauro recondita atque conferta sunt bona . i. e. What is it that may not be learned in the Psalmes ? Doth not the greatnesse of all vertue , the Rule of Righteousnesse , the gracefulnesse of charity , the Consummation of prudence , the law of patience , and every thing that may be called good , flow from them ? The knowledge of God , the perfect Prediction of Christ to come in the flesh , the common hope of the Resurrection , the feare of punishments , the Promise of glory , the revelation of mysteries , yea all good things are hid and heaped together in these Psalmes , as in some great and common Treasury . Aug. in lib. Psalmorunt Prolog . For , if we look at the matter of the Psalmes , how rich is it ! Consider ,

In the Book of Psalms 1. God dealeth with us , by 1. Information ; thence arise Psalmi 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , the Didacticall or Teaching Psalms . 2. Exhortation ; thence the 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 or 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. the Hortatory Psalmes ; or Admonitory Ps. 3. Consolation ; thence the 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. Consolatory Psalms . 4. Narratiō of things already past ; thence 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. the Historicall Psalmes . 5. Prediction , or foretelling of things to come ; thence Psalmi 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. the Propheticall Psalmes . 2. We deal with God , by 1. Prayer ; whence Psalmi 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e Petitory or Praying Psalms . 2. Prayse & thanksgiving ; thence Psalmi 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , i. e. the Gratulatory or Thanksgiving Psalms .

Penmen of the Book of Psalmes are supposed by some to be many ; and the Titles of divers Psalmes do import as much unto us . Ten Pen-men are enumerated . viz. David , Solomon , Moses , Asaph , Ethan , Heman , Ieduthun , and the three sons of Korah ; but Augustine thinks David was Penman of them all , de Civitat . dei l. 17. c. 14. However David penned greatest part of them , as the Titles and Testimonies in the New Testament do intimate .

Some thinke that Ezra after the Babylonish Captivity , collected these Psalmes , ( before dispersed ) into one volume . Some think this was done by King Hezekiah's friends or servants before the Babylonish Captivity , Athanasius in Synopsi .

Sum and Scope of the Psalms , seems to be . To set out the sweet entercourse and Communion betwixt God & his Church and people in all outward Conditions , and inward soul cases ; how therin they are weak or strong ▪ believe , hope , joy , lament , confesse , pray , vow , praise the Lord , &c. as occasion requires ; and how God tries , delivers , comforts , supports , encourages , instructs , enables them , and faithfully deales with them , in all variety of their cases and conditions . But every particular Psalme hath his particular Scope ; handling distinct matters upon distinct occasions . Some being penned before , some under , some after the Babylonish Captivity , as is evident .

Principal parts . This Book is by the Hebrews divided into five Books , viz.

1. From Psal. 1. to the end of Psal. 41. concluded with , Amen and Amen . 2. From Psal. 42. to the end of Psal. 72. shut up with . Amen and Amen . Ended ▪ are the Prayers of David son of Iesse . 3. From Psal. 73. to the end of Psal. 89. closed with , Amen and Amen . 4. From Psal. 90. to the end of Psal. 106. ended with , Amen , Halelu-jah . 5. From beginning of Psal. 107. to the end of Psal. 150. concluding with Halelu-jah .

This Division seems to arise from the peculiar close of these five Psalmes .

Or thus , The Psalmes are either 1 Directed from man to God , as the 1 Praying , and 2 Thankesgiving Psalms . 2 Or from God to man . As the Psalmes which are 1 Hortatory , 2 Consolatory , 3 Didacticall . 4 Propheticall .

The Particular unfolding of the Penman , Kind , Occasion , Matter , Scope and Principall Parts of every Psalme severally ; will make a large Appendix to this Tract , and is reserved till some other opportunity .

2. In Solomons Books , ( the wisest of Kings , 1 King . 3.12 . & 4.29 . ) His Bookes are three , which according to the severall Doctrines , and matters comprised in them , we may distinguish into 1 Proverbiall , 2 Penitentiall and 3 Nuptiall . It is hard to say at what time these severall Books were penned by Solomon , yet perhaps the Nuptiall Book , was penned in his younger years , when his affections were more warme , active , lively in spirituals . The Proverbiall Book in his manly ripe age , when his prudence and parts were at highest , most grave , solid , setled : And the Penitentiall Book in his old age ▪ after all the vaine courses which he had lost himselfe in , as the current of the Book seems clearly to evidence .

Proverbs .

1. HIs Proverbiall Book called the PROVERBS OF SOLOMON , because though it containe other's Proverbs , yet most are Solomon's Prov. 1.1 . In Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mis●le Shelomoh , i. e. either Similitudes , or excelling sentences , that overcome and beare rule over the rest , from mashal , which notes dominion .

This book was penned not by one , but by divers : and that not at one , but at severall times . Solomon penned the nine first chapters , in that Order , as they are , as also c. 10. to c. 25. Cartwright in loc. Solomon was Author of the Proverbs also , from c. 25. to c. 30. But the men of Hezekiah King of Iudah copied them out , Prov. 25.1 . probably they collected them out of other writings of Solomon , and ranked them in this Order , wherein we now have them . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 120. Cartw. in Prov. 25.1 . and Iun. ibid. who thinkes they extracted these Proverbs out of the Records of the Acts of Solomon , and digested them into a body ; most of these Proverbs appertaining to Ethicall and Civil administration . The thirtieth chapter was penned by Agur sonne of Iakeh , c. 30.1 . of him we read elsewhere no further mention in Scripture . He was a Prophet , Prov. 30.1 . His Proverbiall Prophecy is annexed to Solomons Proverbs , perhaps because of mutuall resemblance between them .

The 31th chapter containes the Proverbiall instructions , with which Bathsheba trained up Solomon ( here called Lemuel ) in his tender years , which instructions King Solomon committed to writing afterwards . Iun. in loc. Cartw. in loc.

The Scope . To instruct men in true wisedome and understanding , the very head and height whereof is the sincere feare of the Lord , Prov. 1.2 . to 8. To this end the Book is filled with choice succinct sententious Aphorismes , Adages , or Proverbs , compendiously holding forth duties of Piety to God , Equity to man , Sobriety towards ones selfe .

Generall Distribution of the Book take thus .

I. Here 's Solomons Preface to his Proverbs , which hath a methodicall texture and coherence in it self , c. 1. to 10. II. Here is the whole Body or Book of the Proverbs themselves , which are either , 1. Solomons owne Proverbs , which or most part are pithy , distinct Aphotismes , without method , dependance , coherence , &c. and these . 1. Written by Solomon himselfe , c. 10.1 . to c. 25.1 . 2. Written by him , and collected by the men of King Hezekiah , as c. 25.1 . to ● . 30.1 . 2. Or others Proverbs by way of Appendix annexed to Solomons . viz ▪ 1 ▪ Of Agur. c. 30. 2. Of Bathsheba , but written by Solomon , c. 31.

Ecclesi :

2. HIs Penitential Book , Solomons Retractations or Recantations , called in Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The WORDS OF THE PREACHER Eccles. 1.1 . and to the same sense in Greek , Latin , and English , ECCLESIASTES , or The Preacher , because Solomon being furnished with wisedome and manifold experience touching the vanity of all things besides true Religion , preacheth the same to the Church for the instruction and warning of all Gods people : This Book he wrote in extream Old age , Repenting of his fall : This seemes to be one of his last Acts , according to that , 2 Chron. 9.29 .

Scope of this Book is to evidence wherein a mans true happinesse consists . viz. not in any sublunary , naturall , created excellency , all such being vanity of vanities , extreamest vanity and vexation of Spirit ; but only in true sincere feare of God , and truth of Religion , compare Eccles. 1.2 . with Eccles. 12.13 , 14.

Principall parts ; To this end , touching true happinesse , he insists upon it , 1. Negatively , showing where it is not to be found . viz Generally , not in any meer , naturall , sublunary treasure in this world . Specially , not in 1. Knowledge of all naturall things . 2. Pleasures , or sweetest earthly delights . 3. Highest Honours , Or 4. Compleatest riches , c. 1. to c. 7. 2. Positively and Affirmatively , wherein true felicity is to be found , and this he showes . 1. Particularly , declaring what are the degrees and meanes of happinesse , so farre as a man may attaine thereunto in this imperfect life , c. 7. to c. 12.8 . 2. Summarily in the close of the whole Book , c. 12.8 . to the end .

This Book is an undeniable Argument of Solomons repentance after his Relapse , and consequently of his salvation .

Song of Songs .

3. HIs Nuptiall Book treating of the spiritual Contract , and Marraiage betwixt Christ and his Church , called the SONG OF SONGS , which was Solomons , c. 1.1 . and CANTICLES , because of all Solomons Songs , which were 1005. 1 King . 4.32 . This was the choycest and most excellent ; the matter thereof being one of the sweetest spirituall mysteries . viz. the Churches spirituall espousals to , and Communion with Jesus Christ , that great mystery , Eph. 5.32 .

Scope of this Song , is , ( under the Metaphor or Allegory of lovers upon Contract , and intending marriage , ) to shadow out to us that sublime spirituall happy union and Communion betwixt Christ and his Church , inchoate in this life , more imperfectly with the Iewes , more perfectly with the Gentiles : Consummate in the life to come . This is carried on dialogue-wise betwixt Christ and his Church ; His friends and her Damosels , being the foure speakers , especially the two first . As is the Custome of a Bridegroome and a Bride .

Principall parts , of this Song of Songs .

I. The Inscription , denoting the 1 kind of writing ; 2 Excellency 3 and Penman of it c. 1.1 . II. The substance of the Song , Streaming out a Torrent of spirituall love betwixt Christ and the Church , laid down Dialogue-wise , in a familiar Colloquy betwixt 1 Christ as the Bridegroome . 2 The Church as the Bride , and 3 the friends of them both rejoycing in the marriage ; All in a continued Allegory . Herein are particularly , 1. The Ardent desires of the Church after Christ , as impatient of his absence : with Christs acceptance thereof . c. 1. ver. 2. to 9. 2. The Reciprocall invitatory Commendations of one another ; and the mutuall gratulations and contentment of Christ and the Church in one another , c. 1.9 . to the end of c. 2. 3. The Churches renewed desires night and day , at home and abroad , in the City in the fields ( as it were ) to bring Christ neerer to her self , c. 3.1 . to 6. yea rather to have her selfe brought immediately to the full enjoyment of Christ in heaven , v. 6. to the end . 4. Christ most affectionately Prayseth his Church in her Members , professing himselfe ravished with her faith , graces , and spirituall beauty , c. 4.1 . to 15. which is amplified , 1. By the Churches selfe-denying acknowledging all her graces to come from Christ as the fountaine , v 15. 2. By her Prayer for his influence to make her ( as a Garden of spices ) more and more fruitfull ; and for his presence to accept her fruit , v. 16. 3. By Christs satisfying her desires , comming into his Garden , Accepting the fruits thereof , and welcoming his friends , c. 5.1 . 5. The Churches Spirituall Desertion , in Christs withdrawing himselfe from her . Where are , I. The occasion of it , Her carnall Scurity , c. 5.2.3 . II. The Manner of it ; withdrawing , yet leaving some quickning grace behinde him . v. 4 , 5. III. The Consequents of it , in respect of , 1. The Church her selfe , v. 4 , 5 , 6. 2. The Watchmen abusing her , ver. 7. 3. The Daughters of Ierusalem , whom she charged to signifie her distresse to her beloved , ver. 8. This charge is amplified , 1 Partly by the inquiry of the Daughters of Ierusalem , what Christ is ? ver. 9. 2 Partly by the Churches Patheticall description of Christs transcendent excellencies , ver. 10. to the end . 3 Partly , by the inquiry of the daughters of Jerusalem , after Christ , c. 6.1 . 4 Partly by the Churches declaring to them , where Christ was , viz. He was now returned , and gone down into his Garden c. 6.2 . 5 Partly by her affectionate complacency in Christ returned , ver. 3. 6. Christs sweet and consolatory deportment towards his Church after her Desertion , and his returne to her . Wherein , 1. He assures her she is as precious in his eyes , and as deare to his heart as ever , c. 6.4 . to 11. 2. He declares his desire after the Spirituall Spring of the Churches graces , after the winter of her afflictions , ver. 11. 3. He discovers the Rapture of his ravished affections to her , most sweetly inviting her to himselfe , ver. 12 , 13. most highly commending her throughout , c. 7.1 . to 8. and promising his presence , and what he will do for her ; that she may become most delightfull to him , v. 8.9 . 7. Finally , the Church reciprocates her utmost affection to Christ , for his love . And this , I. More Generally c. 7.10 . II. More Particularly , Her desire , 1 That Christ and she may go together to view their Husbandry , whether their plants did flourish and fructifie , viz. The Gospel thrive , ver. 11 , 12 13. 2 That she may enjoy Christ most intimately and familiarly , c. 8. 1 , 2 , 3. 3. That the Daughters of Jerusalem may not disturbe him , ver. 4. 4. That it may be considered , what she hath forgone and undergone for Christs love , ver. 5. 5. That Christ would give her a fuller 1 Confirmation of his love , setting her as a seale upon his heart : and a fuller 2 Manifestation or evident assurance therof , Setting her as a Seale upon his Arme , strengthning , helping her , &c. and this because she beares to Christ an invincible and unquenchable love , ver. 6 , 7. 6. That the Gentiles called A little Sister , may be called , and incorporated into the Church with the Jewes , ver. 8 , 9 , 10. This is amplified by Christs common care of both , as one Vineyard , kept by himselfe , not by others , as Solomons was ▪ ver. 11 , 12. Christ teaching his Spouse her duty , To her neighbours in publishing and bearing witnesse to his Truth ; To himselfe in Prayer and Thanksgiving , ver. 13. III. The Conclusion of the Song , containing the Churches most Ardent Desire after Christs second coming , that the marriage betwixt Christ and her selfe , may be compleatly consummated in Heaven those Mountaines of spices , c. 8.14 .

III. THE PROPHETICALL BOOKS .

THus farre of Books Historicall and Doctrinal , Now to the Books Propheticall . For distinction sake they are called PROPHETICALL , because the matter of them is principally Propheticall , though many Historical and Doctrinal passages are also inserted in them all along ; as there are many prophecies of things to come , dispersed up and down the other Books , which yet are principally Historical and Doctrinal .

These Prophetical Books are in all 16 , ( Lamentations being counted an Appendix to Ieremiah ) they may be considered , 1. According to the times of their prophecy and writing . 2. According to their Order as set in our Bibles . They are not placed in our Bibles in that method and Order as they were at the first spoken and written by the prophets .

I. According to the times wherein they were first prophesied and written . These times are for most part discovered in the beginning of the severall Prophesies , and of such we may determine certainly : or they may be collected from other Scriptures , or the matter of the Prophesies , of which we cannot conclude altogether so cleerly .

These times may be referred ( as the Historical books ) to three principall Periods , viz. 1. Before , 2. Neere or under . 3. After the Babylonish captivity . And if in these three periods we parallel these Prophets , with those Historical Books , they will notably help to cleer and explain one another .

I. Before the transportation of Israel into Babylon , These Prophets prophesied and wrote , viz. 1. Under Vzziah King of Judah , and Ieroboam the second , King of Israel . IONAH , he prophecied before or about beginning of Ieroboams Reigne , See 2 King . 14 25. As Iun. noteth in Ionah 1.1 . About the close of his Reigne , thinkes Drusius in Quaesitis Epist. 9. 1. AMOS . See Amos 1.1 . 2. Under Vzziah , Iotham , Ahaz and Hezekiah Kings of Judah , and Ieroboam King of Israel . HOSEA . Hos. 1.1 . IOEL . Ioel prophesied about the same time with Hosea , as is thought ; because the things prophecied in Ioel , relate to the dayes of Vzziah and Ieroboam . See Iun. Annot. in Ioel 1.1 . ISAIAH . Isa. 1.1 . ( here the days of King Ieroboam are not mentioned . ) MICHAH . Only under Iotham , Ahaz , and Hezekiah , Mich. 1.1 . 3. Under Iosiah . IEREMIAH . Till the eleventh yeere of Zedekiah , Jer. 1 , 2 , 3. being compared with Ier. 51.64 . Iun. Annot. ibid. LAMENTATIONS . Written by Ieremiah , upon occasion of King Josiah's Death 2 Chr. 35.25 . ZEPHANIAH . Zeph. 1.1 . OBADIAH . Seems to be contemporary with Ieremiah , compare his prophecy with Ier. 49.7 . &c. And Ezek. 25. 13. &c. See Iun. in Obad. 1. NAHVM . About the close of Iosiah's Reigne as the matter of the Book , and the harmony of the History import . So Iun. in Nah. 1.1 . HABBAKKVK . About the end of Iosiahs Reigne , or in his sons Reign , Iunius in Hab. 1.1 . II. Neere upon , and under the Babylonish Captivity . DANIEL . In the third yeere of Iehoiakim's Reigne , Dan. 1.1 . EZEKIEL . In the fifth yeere of King Iehoiakin's Captivity , Ezek. 1.1 , 2 , 3. III. After their returne from Babylons Captivity . HAGGAI . In the second yeere of Darius , and the sixth moneth , Hag. 1.1 . ZECHARIAH . In the second yeere of Darius , the eighth moneth , Zech. 1.1 . MALACHI ▪ Last Prophecy of the Old-Testament . Reproves the corruptions after building of the Temple . See Iun. in Mal. 1.1 .

II. According to their Order as they are placed in our Bibles . And so they are resolved into two Ranks , viz. 1. The Greater Prophets , viz. The foure first ( the Lamentations being annexed as an Appendix to Ieremiah , ) so called , not because these had greater authority , then the others , but from the greatnesse of their Bookes ; The prophecy of Isaiah , being neer as big or bigger then all the lesser prophets , together . 2. The Lesser Prophets . viz. The twelve latter , Hosea , &c. Which were digested into one volumne of old by the Jewes , ( called the Booke of the Prophets , Act. 7.42 . ) some of them being very small , lest any of them should be lost . All these books are named from their Penmen , except the Lamentations .

I. The Greater Prophets , are ●he Books of Isaiah , Ieremiah , Ezekiel , Daniel .

Isaiah

ISAIAH . This Book is set first , ( though in time Ionah , Amos , Hosea , and Ioel , seeme to have been before him ) perhaps , because of the excellency of the Prophecy , most frequently , fully and clearly prophecying of Christ , as if Christ had been exhibited already , had suffered already . Hence the Ancients called him Evangelisticus Propheta , & Propheticus Evangelista , The Evangelicall Prophet , and Propheticall Evangelist , Or the Evangelist and Apostle of the Old Testament . Christ and his Apostles greatly esteemed this Book ▪ it being oftner alledged in the New Testament , then any other Book of the Old Testament ▪ except the psalms . Some observe Isaiah to be quoted sixty times , the Psalmes sixty foure times . Alsted . Ethiopians had great respect to this Book as appears , Act. 8.27.28 .

Time of this Prophecy was in foure Kings Reigns , Isa. 1.1 . if we reckon from the death of Vzziah , Isa. 6.1 . till the fifteenth yeare of King Hezekiah , when the Babilonish Ambassadours came to Hezekiah and saw all his Treasures , 2 King . 20. 12 , 13 , 14. He must at the least prophecy fourty five years : but its probable he prophecied longer .

Scope ; To hold forth the true Messiah clearly , as the only sufficient Remedy against all sin and misery .

Generall parts , This Prophecy is either .

1. Comminatory , as it is for the most part , till c. 40. these promises are now and then inter-woven ; Herein 1. The Jewes are threatned , c. 1. to c. 13. 2. Enemies of the Jewesh Church are threatned , for the Churches benefit , c , 13. to c. 29. 3. The Jewes againe are threatned with the Babylonish Captivity , c. 29. to 40. 2. Promissory , and that 1. For the Restauration of the Old Church of the Jews from the misery of that Captivity , c. 40. to c. 49. 2. For the compleating and consummation of the Churches glory in Gospel times by Christ himselfe , c. 49. to the end of the Prophecy .

Jeremiah .

JEREMIAH . He was of the Towne of Anatho●h , Jer. 1.1 . a very young man when he began to prophesie , Ier. 1.6 .

Time of his prophecy was in days of Iosiah , Iehoiakin and Zedekiah , Jer. 1.2 , 3. which must needs be fourty three years at least by computation , both in Iudea and Egypt .

Scope . To divorce the Iewes in his times from their many horrid sins , denouncig heavy judgemenas against them : But to comfort the true servants of God in their lowest misery , with promises of Christ , and threatnings against all their enemies .

Generall parts . Herein are 1. The Preface , containing the vocation of Ieremiah , c. 1. 2 The Prophecy it self , which is directed both against the Iews & the enemies of the Jewes , ● Against the Jews 1. in Iudea , under King Iosiah , c. 2. to c. 21. Under Iehoiachim and Zedekiah , c. 21. to c. 43. 2. In Egypt , c. 43.44.45 . 2 Against the Jewes enemies . viz. Egyptians , c. 46. Philistines and Tyrians , c. 47. Moabites . c. 48. Ammonites , Edomites , &c. c. 49. Babylonians , c. 50.51 . 3. Conclusion Historicall , annexed to the Prophecy , by some other then Ierem●ah , c. 52.

Lamenta :

UNto the prophecy of JEREMIAH may be annexed as an Appendix the Book of LAMENTATIONS . called in Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Kinoth , i. e. Lamentations ; 2 Chron. 35.25 . and 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Echah , viz. the first Hebrew word of the Book ( as many other Books are named by the first word of the Book ) . This Book seems to be penned by Ieremiah the Prophet , upon the death of that precious King ●osiah , 2 Chron. 35.25 . when the Jewes fell to their sinfull confidence in Egypt , which Beginnings of sorrows and miseries gave Ieremy occasion , ( he knowing by the spirit of Prophecy the judgments which should befall them ) to lament all the miseries from Iosiahs death , till the destruction of the Temple and Ierusalem , and captivity of the people in Babylon . The foure first chapters are penned alphebetically , ( as many Psalmes are for help of memory in such an excellent piece as this is , ) In 1.2 , 4. chapters , every verse begins with a distinct letter of the Hebrew Alphabet , c. 3. hath only every third verse so beginning . Most mournefull melting , patheticall affections abound in the whole Book . Greg. Nazianzen . Affirmed thus of himselfe , As oft as I take this Book into my hands , and read the Lamentations , I perceive my speech to be stopped , and I am overwhelmed with tears , and methinks I see that Calamity as it were set before mine eyes , and I joyne Lamentations with Jeremiah ; Greg. Nazianzen . Or. 12. pag. 202. Paris , 1630.

Scope , seemes to be this ▪ Lively to point out the severity and impartiality of Gods judgements , even against his own dearest people the Iewes for their iniquities , inviting them to repentance , faith and prayer , for obtaining of Gods favour in pardoning of sin , and removall of judgement .

Principall parts . Are : I. Narratory , wherein are contained . 1. A most Patheticall Description of the wofull miseries , overwhelming Ierusalem and Iudea , yet all acknowledged to be most justly inflicted for their sin , c. 1. 2. A mournfull expostulating lamentation for the desolating miseries upon all persons and affairs , Civil or Ecclesiasticall in the whole Kingdome , c. 2. 1. to 19. 3. The Prophets counsell to them to Convert to God and pray ; and he gives them a forme of words , c. 2. verse 19.20 , 21 , 22. 4. The Churches sad complaints ( in one mans person ) of Gods many and heavy afflictions upon her , c. 3. 1. to 18. 5. The Arguments of comfort , wherewith the Church supported her selfe in these extremities v. 18. to 42. 6. How the Church eased her heart in crying to God for her selfe , against her enemies , v. 42. to the end . 7. Most Patheticall Aggravations of her calamities . c. 4.1 . to 21. II. Minatory , against the enemies of Israel , c. 4.21 . III. Promissory , to the afflicted daughter of Sion , c. 4.22 . IIII. Petitory , wherein the Church of God , 1 bewaileth her miseries , 2 Acknowledgeth sin to be the cause thereof , 3 Deprecats his wrath , 4 And implores his mercy , c. 5.

Ezekiel .

EZEKIEL . He was descended of the Priestly stock , Ezek. 1.3 . Prophecyed in the land of Chaldea , to the Captives and Gentiles , in the fifth yeare of Iehoiachin's captivity , Ezek. 1.1 , 2 , 3.

Scope . To comfort the Church of God in Captivity , and to instruct them how to behave themselves therein , amongst profane Heathenish Idolaters .

Generall parts . Herein are ,

I. The Preface setting forth the Prophets calling to this office ; Gods call , c. 1. Ezekiels fearfulnes , c. 2. Gods confirming and strengthning him , c. 3.

II. The Prophecy it self , containing three Ranks of Sermons preached at severall times , to severall persons , &c. 1. To the Iews , whom he sharply rebuks & threatens for their impieties in seventeen severall sermons , c. 4. to c. 25. 2. To the enemies of Gods people , whose ruine and destruction he foretels in eight sermons , c. 25. to c. 33. 3. To the Jewes , exhorting them to repentance , and encouraging them to hope , not only for an inchoate deliverance from Babylons slavery , and that in six sermons , c. 33. to c. 40. But also for a consummate spirituall deliverance from spirituall misery by Christ the Messiah , and this is set out in vision 1 Of the new Temple to be erected , c. 40.41 , 42. 1 Of the new Worship of God to be restored , c. 43.44 . 3 Of the new Ierusalem , and new earth that should be discovered , c. 45.46 , 47 , 48.

Daniel :

DANIEL , Daniel was carried captive with the Jewes into Babylon , Dan. 1.6 . living and prophecying among the Captives , a long time , foretold future events to the end of the world . Was a man of an excellent spirit , Dan. 5.12 . Author of this Book , Matth. 24.15 . Dan. 12.4 .

Scope , To display unto Gods Church and people Gods wise and faithfull dealings with them in all states , from dayes of Nebuchadnezzar till Christ , for the comfort of the Iews , and from Christ to the end of the world , his peculiar Providence over his own in all their distresses and deliverances , for the comfort of the Saints under the New Testament .

Generall Parts . This book relates principally two sorts of matters , viz. 1. Matters done already for time past , laid down Historically , c. 1. to 7. and these things are reported 1. Summarily . c. 1. 2 Severally under the Babylonian Monarchy , whereof we have 1 The Rise , c. 2.3 . 2 The Growth , c. 4. 3 The close , c. 5. Or under the Persian Monarchy , c. 6. 2. Matters to be done afterwards for future , laid down Prophetically , c. 7. to the end of the book . He prophecies , 1. Of future Calamities , where , in days of Belshazzar , he had a double vision Of the foure beasts c. 7. Of the Ram and He-goat , c. 8. In the time of the Persian Monarchy , where he hath a double vision , One in the first yeare of Darius the Mede , c. 9. The other in the third yeare of Cyrus , c 10. with the exposition of them c. ●1 . 2. Of the Elects deliverance from these calamities , both before and after Christ to the worlds end ; though calamities of the Saints be sharp and long , yet at last deliverance shall fully come , and the promise thereof not faile , but be exactly fulfilled , c. 12.

2 The Lesser Prophets or Minor Prophets so called , not because they had lesser Authority from God for their Propheticall office , but because their Books are of a farre lesse bulk and volume then the former . They are twelve , Hosea , Ioel , &c.

Hoshea

HOSHEAH . he was sonne of Beeri , Prophecyed the same time that Isaiah did , Hos. 1.1 . with Isa. 1.1 . 2. He prophecyed ( as is probable ) longer then any other of the Prophets ; in all about seventy years . Principally deals against the ten Tribes of Israel , now and then against Iudah . His stile is sharp and succinct , which makes him somewhat more dark and obscure .

Scope , To convince the Iewes , especially the ten Tribes of their many great iniquities , especially of their idolatryes , and to perswade them to repentance with hope of mercy .

Generall parts . This Prophecy is either I. Parabolicall , comprehending two Types . The first being propounded , c. 1. Accommodated , c. 2. The second in , c. 3. In both which under the Person of a Prophet , he signifies in himselfe future events , and evils that should befall the Kingdome and kingly house of Israel , Captivity . Blindnesse of the people , Illumination and Conversion of a remnant by Christ . II. Plaine and naked , And so it is , Comminatory , and Consolatory . 1. Comminatory , which is laid downe chiefly in three sermons , or speciall Prophecies , viz. 1. Against all Israel , for their vanity , inhumanity , impiety ; too evident in the Kingdomes present bad Government , dehorting Iudah from Israels sins , both by the horrour of their injustice and feare of punishment , c. 4. 2. Against Priests , Israel , and the kings house , threatning ruine for their spirituall whoredome , and obstinate backsliding from God , observance of humane Traditions , carnall con●idence in forraine Aid of Assyrians , Contempt of Gods word , casting off Gods Covenant , and other wickednesses and hypocrisies , c. 5 , 6 , 7. And all this under the Person of a judge . 3. Vnder the Person of an Herauld , he proclaimes Gods judgements against them and the causes thereof . viz. for their defection from his worship and spirituall Kingdome , and from the temporall Kingdome of David , Hypocrisie , departing from all good , secure joyfulnesse , sacriledge and other hereditary sins , threatning poverty , deportation , losse of Gods worship , death and devastation , c. 8 , 9 , 10 2. Consolatory , which containes two sermons . 1. Under the person of a Father , God promising in Christ , that ( though neither Prophet , law , mercies nor judgements had brought them to repentance , yet ) his Elect should be converted , embrace Christ and the promises , c. 11. 2. Disswading them from Per●idiousnesse , Idolatry , Avarice , Pride , he promiseth , ( the wicked being destroyed ) to preserve a remnant , and to heale the penitent , c. 12 , 13 , 14. in c. 14. putting on the person of a Friend .

Joel .

JOEL . Ioel was sonne of Pethuel , Joel 1.1 . Some think this Pethuel was Samuel so called , i. e. A perswader of God , Because what he asked of God in Prayer , he obtained . Alst.

Scope ; to convince the Iewes of their sins by occasion of an imminent famine and to draw them to repentance , holding forth many inviting promises to the penitent .

Generall Parts . This Prophecy is , 1. Comminatory , threatning a grievous famine ( taking occasion thereof , by the Loc●sts Caterpillers , and Palmer wormes , the forerunners of a famine ) labouring to make the people sensible of present evils , and sins the cause thereof ▪ c. 1.

2. Hortatory , stirring them up to publique repentance , c. 2. ver. 1. to 19. Which Exhortation is urged , 1. By promises to his people both touching , Temporall deliverances from present evils , ver. 19. to 28. Eternall Evangelicall mercies in Christ , ver. 28. to the end of the chap. 2. By threats against their adversaries on every side , c. 3.

Amos.

AMOS . Amos an heardman of Tekoa , yet furnished with a Propheticall spirit , Amos 1.1 . Severely denounceth judgements ; is thought to be slaine by Amaziah the Priest .

Scope , To hold forth the severity of Gods judgements against his Churches enemies , and his Church it selfe ; for their sins . Annexing some Evangelicall Promises to a Remnant .

Generall Parts Herein are , I. Comminations . 1. Against the enemies of the Church , for their insolencies against his people , &c. c. 1. 2. Against the Jewes and Israelites themselves for their own wickednesses ▪ which threatnings are laid down . 1. More plainely against their Idolatry , c 2 , 3. Violence , c. 4. Impiety , Pride , inhumanity , luxury , c. 5.6 . 2. More darkly and obscurely under three severall Types , the first c. 7. The second c. 8. The third c. 9. ad ver. 11. II. Consolations and Evangelicall Promises , c. 9. ver. 11. to the end .

Obadiah .

OBADIAH . Who he was , is not evident by Scripture , but only by this Booke , that he was a Prophet . He prophesied against the Edomites or Idumeans , who came of Edom , which is Esau , Gen. 36 , 1.8 , 19. and hated Israelites Iacobs race , as Esau hated Jacob himselfe .

Scope , To threaten ruine to the Edomites , for their enmity against the Israelites , and to comfort the Church with promised Salvation and deliverance in Christ .

Generall parts .

1. A Commination of imminent ruine to the Edomites for their enmity against the Israelites ver. 1. to 12. 2. A Prohibition of Edom from further injur●ng his people , ver. 12. to 17. 3. Ample promises of deliverance and salvation to the Church , by the kingdom of Christ , from all her enemies . ver. 17 , to the end .

Jonah .

JONAH . He was son of Amitta● , Ionah 1.1 . Some call him The Prophet and Apostle of the Gentiles ; because he was sent to preach to Ninive the Metropolis of the Assyrians , a Gentilish City . This Booke is chiefly Historicall .

Scope . To shew how God invited the City of Niniveh to repentance by Ionas preaching .

Generall parts .

1. Gods first calling of Jonas to preach , to Niniveh , with Jonas his refusall , Gods humbling him for it , and the effects of that humiliation , Ionas his Prayer , and deliverance , c. 1 , 2. 2. Gods second calling of him to the same taske , together with Jonas his obedience , Ninive's Repentance , Gods forbearance of the Judgement threatned , and Ionas his passionate causelesse discontent , c. 3 , 4. Nineveh Repenting , aggravated Israel's and Judah's impenitency .

Micah :

MICAH . He is described , Mic. 1.1 . Coetaneous to Esay , imitator of Esay , compare them together . Prophecied in corruptest times .

Scope . To threaten destruction to Iudah and Israel for their great impieties fomented among them by their Rulers and Prophets ; but to comfort the remnant of the Elect by Evangelicall Promises in Christ .

Generall parts .

I. His first Sermon . 1. Minatory , both in generall against Iudah and Israel for their sins , c. 1 , 2. and in especiall against Magistrates for their injustice , c. 3. 2. Consolatory , through the mercies of God , and the coming of the Messiah c. 4 , 5. II. His second Sermon , contaninig Gods 1. contestations against their sinnes c. 6. 2. Gods Consolations of his Elect remnant , with Gospel promises , c. 7.

Nahum ,

NAHUM . He is described , Nah. 1.1 . About same time that Ieremiah prophecyed in Iudea , Nahum prophecyed against Nineveh the Metropolis of Assyria , relapsing to impiety after Ionas his preaching ; before Babylons Captivity .

Scope . To comfort the Iewes and the godly Israelites by the denouncing of judgments against the Assyrians , who under Pul , Tiglath-Pelesar , Salmanazar , Senacherib and Esarhaddon their Kings , grievously infested Israel : Esarhaddon carrying Israel Captive to Assyria in dayes of Mannasseh .

Generall parts .

I. A Preface to the prophecy from the Nature of God , 1. Most potent and severe against all his wicked enemies , c. 1. ver. 2. to 7. 2. Kind and gracious to the godly and faithfull , ver. 7. II. Denunciation of judgement against Nineveh , and the kingdom of Assyria , under the Metaphor of a mighty ●lood that should at last destroy them , c. 1.8 , 9 , 10. Together with the causes of those judgements ver. 11. to the end of the chap. III. Amplification of these threatned judgments , 1. Partly by a lively Ad-umbration and description of them , c. 2. 2. Partly by a Narration of the causes procuring these judgments , viz Their Cruelties , whordoms , sorceries , Idolatries , c. 3.1 ▪ to 8. 3. Partly by confirmation of these threatnings fore-prophecied , by example of Gods judgements upon Alexandria in Aegypt , c. 3.8 . to the end .

Habakk :

HABAKKUK . As Nahum prophesied against Niniveh and Assyrians ; so Habakkuk against both Iewes and Babylonians .

Scope . Both to warne the Iewes of their overthrow by the Chaldeans for their sinnes , and to comfort them afterwards by their enemies destruction , but their own life of Faith in deepest afflictions . The prophesy is laid down Dialogue-wise .

Generall parts .

I. The prophets Complaint and Expostulation to the LORD against the extreame wickednesse of the Iewes , c. 1.2 , 3 , 4. II. The LORDS answer to the prophet , threatning great calamities to the Iewes by the proud destructive Caldeans . ver. 5. to 12. III. A second Expostulation of the prophet , against the cruel oppression of Iewes , as well good as bad , under the wicked blaspemous King of Caldeans , ver. 12. to the end of the chap. IIII. Gods second answer to the Prophet . 1. Directing the good to manage such deep afflictions under the Caldeans , viz. By living by Faith in hope of deliverance , c. 2.1 , to 5. 2. Threatning to be avenged upon the Caldeans for all their wickednesse and cruelty against his people , ver. 5. to end of the c. V. The prophets sealing up the Doctrine of the life of Faith in his excellent prayer penned in his own and the Churches name , c. 3.

Zephania ,

ZEPHANIAH . His stock , and the time of his prophecy is described , c. 1.1 . He was coetaneous to Ieremiah , prophecied the same things for substance , but farre more briefly and succinctly . He prophesied against both Iewes and forraigne Nations .

Chiefe Scope . To Reprove the wickednesse of the Iewes , especially of the Princes and many of the people , for hankering after Idolatry , expecting it should be set up againe , Hiding their Idols ; even after that glorious Reformation of King Iosiah . And to comfort the Elect remnant with Evangelicall promises , and Reformation by Christ .

Generall parts .

1. A most severe denunciation of desolation and other judgements to befall all sorts both in Jerusalem and Iudea , for their secret idolatries , oppressions and injurious coveteousnesse , c. 1. 2. An exhortation of the Jewes to Repentance and self-Reformation both the gracelesse Iewes and those that had some sparkes of Grace appearing in them . Partly by the exemplary formidable judgements which God would execute upon forraigne Nations in sight of the Iewes , c. 2. Partly by threatnings of judgements against Iewes themselves for their sins if they repented not , c. 3.1 . to 8. 3. A sweet consolation made up of Evangelicall promises touching the calling of the Gentiles , Restauration of the Church , pardon of sins , Purity and everlasting glory by Christ , c. 3.8 . to the end .

Haggai .

HAGGAI . Of him and the time of his prophecy , See Hag. 1.1 .

Scope . To quicken the Iewes that had returned from the Babylon●sh Captivity , ( being now extreame ingratefully dull in the worke of Reformation , ) to lay aside all sluggish delayes and excuses , and to make haste with the repaire of the Temple .

Generall parts .

I. Gods sharp reprehension of the ingratefull sluggish Jewes for their great sin in not repairing the Temple , c. 1.1 . to 12. II. Gods singular encouragement of the Iewes to fall speedily and vigorously to this work , by divers sorts of excellent promises ▪ viz. 1. Of his promoting and perfecting the worke , when they should sit close to it , c. 1.12 . to the end . 2. Of the surpassing glory that he would communicate to this latter Temple ( though the structure was not so stately ) beyond that of the former Temple . c. 2.1 . to 10. 3. Of Gods singular benediction upon the Corne and all the fruits of the earth for their use , if they would buckle diligently to this Temple-worke , ver , 10. to 20. 4. Of the glorious excellency of Christs kingdome , the perfection and complement of all Reformation , ver. 20. to the end .

Zechariah

ZECHARIAH , His descent and the time of his Prophecy , See in Zech. 1.1 .

Scope , To encourage and incite the people returned from Captivity , especially the Governours , Zerubbabel and Joshuah , to the building of the Temple .

Generall parts . This Prophecy seems to comprize the summe of five Sermons severally preached by the Prophet . viz.

I. His penitentiall sermon calling the Jews to repentance . This is prefixed as A Preface , before the following Sermons of mercy and judgement , to prepare f●r the receiving of that , the avoiding of this , Zech. 1 , 1.2 . to 7. II. His visionall Sermon . viz. His Propheticall visions , which are in all eight , some very obstruse ; some light may be brought to them , by comparing them with Daniels Prophecy . These visions seem to be delivered at once ; are contained from c. 1 , 7. to c. 7 , 1. These visions are I. Uisions of Mercy , as 1. The vision of men on horse back among the myrrtle-trees in the bottome : pointing out Christs singular presence with , and providence over his Church , in lowest state , c. 1. 7. to 18. 2. The vision of four Carpenters , &c. intimating how God would break and scatter the horns of his Churches enemies , c. 1.18 . to the end . 3. The vision of the man with the measuring line in his hand to measure Ierusalem , promising the Restauration and re-peopling of Ierusalem , c. 2. 4. The vision of Ioshuah the High-Priest in filthy garments , and Sathan at his right hand accusing him : Showing that though sins of people and Priest might be objected against them , and their intercessors , yet they had another High Priest , who would plead their cause , pardon their sin , build the Temple , and quiet his Church , viz. Christ the Branch , c. 3. 5. The vision of the golden candlestick and the two olive trees standing by it : declaring that Gods grace alone is sufficient for the reparation and preservation of his Church , without all other created meanes , against greatest mountaines of opposition , c. 4. II. Uisions of judgement . c. 5. and 6. The vision of the flying Book : and of the Ephah . evidencing , that though their state should be restored , and his Church established amongst them : yet he would severely punish them for their sins at present , and subvert them for future , if their sins grow riper and riper , c. 5. III Uisions of comfort , viz. c. 7. The vision of foure chariots drawne with foure sorts of Horses ; comming out from between two Mountaines of brasse ; Comfortably pointing out , the Provident Decrees and Counsels of God immoveable as mountaines of brasse , and directing ( for his Providence begins and steers all actions ) the course and motion of the foure chariots and horses , ( viz. either the foure Empires of the earth , or ( as some think , ) the Angels of heaven , those ministring spirits ) for the fulfilling of his will for his Churches good ; so that whatsoever his Church had or should further suffer under them , was foreseen and fore-appointed by God himselfe ; a great comfort to them that were come out of captivity already , and to them that as yet remained in captivity , c. 6.1 . to 9. 8. The vision or rather the Historical Praediction of what was really to be done , for his Churches comfort , viz. the oblation of some Iewes which came from Babylon , as Embassadors from the rest , and the typical coronation of Ioshuah the High-Priest under which is declared the Kingdome and Priest-hood of Christ , together with the re-establishment and enlargement of the Church under him , c. 6.9 . to the end . III. His Casuisticall Sermon , wherein the Prophet at large resolves the Iews in a Case of conscience touching Fasting , proposed to him and the Priests , with many other Lessons excellently inserted , c. 7. and c. 8. IV. His Propheticall Sermon , foretelling future events , c. 9.10 . and 11. wherein are principally considerable . 1. Threatnings of destruction to the Churches enemies , Land of Hadrach , Damascus , Hamath , &c. c 9 , 1. to 7. 2. Promises of deliverance and protection to his Church against al their enemies , c. 9 , 7 , 8 3. Promissory predictions of Christs Incarnation , Kingdom , and the Benefits thereof to his people , from whom all comfort and salvation principally flowes , c. 9 , 9. to c. 11 , 1. 4. Denunciations of dreadfull judgements even to the Jewes themselves , for their ingratefull and abominable rejection of Christ and his Gospel , c. 11. V. His Evangelicall Sermon , peculiarly belonging to the Church which Christ had gathered by his Gospel , c. 12.13 , and 14. wherein are laid down many sweet priviledges of the Church . 1. The Churches victory over all her enemies , to whom shee shall be A cup of trembling , A Burdensome stone , A torch of fire in a sheaf c. 12 , 1. to 7. 2. The Churches safety and protection only from the Lord . c. 12 , 7 , 8. 3. The Benefits enwrapped in this salvation for the Church , viz. 1 Heart-wounding repentance for their sinnes that pierced Christ , c. 12 , 9. to the end , 2 Remission of all sins to the penitent by faith in the blood of Christ , c. 13 , 1. 3 Purifying of the Evangelicall doctrine from all pollution and desilement , v. 2. to 7. 4. A select separation of the remnant appertaining to the Election from the drossy multitude , c. 13.7 . to c. 14 , 1● . 4. The removall of all the Churches ruined enemies , from offending the Church any more , or su●duing them to the Church , and consecrating all their wealth to holy uses , c. 14 , 12 to th● end of the Book .

Malachi .

MALACHI . he prophecyed after the Babylonish captivity , the Temple being now repaired , and the publike worship restored , against the many notorious corruptions remaining among them , even after such wonderfull mercyes . He is the last Prophet of the Old Testament , deciphering out in the close of his Book Iohn the Baptist , the first Prophet of the New Testament , Mal. 4.5 , 6. with Luk. 16.16 .

Scope . To call the I●wes , after this Reparation of Gods Temple and worship , to Repentance , from their many and foule corruptions ; especially the comming of Christ the Messiah , the great Reformer and Refiner of his Church , being so neare at hand .

Generall parts . Besides the Title , herein are wrapped up in one continued Sermon , these principall matters .

I. A Preface ( aggravating the ingratefull wickednesse of the Jewes ) drawne from Gods singular love in Election of them in Iacob , when he rejected the Edomites in Esau. c. 1.2 . to 6. II. A sharp contestation against the People , especially the Priest the keepers of the law , for their corruptions . viz. 1. Against their contempt and pollution of the worship of God , which Priests should have vindicated , by office c 1.6 . to c. 2.10 . 2. Against their corrupt Marriages , both Marriages with infidels , and Polygamies . c. 2 10. to 17. 3. Against the wickednesse and perversenesse of many , that made a mock of Gods justice and judgements , c. 2.17 . to c. 3.7 . 4. Against their Sacriledge , in robbing God of Tiths and Offerings &c. c 3.7 . to 13. 5. Against their Atheisticall contempt of Gods feare , worship , and true repentance c. 3.15 . to 4.5 . III. An earnest invitation of all to repentance , that so they might be prepared , duely to entertaine the Messiah , who with his forerunner Iohn the Baptist , in the spirit and power of Elias , was now immediately to appeare in humane flesh , c. 4 , 5 , 6.

Thus farre of the Old Testament , wherein the New Testament is veiled : Come we next to consider of the New Testament , wherein the Old Testament is Revealed .

THE NEW-TESTAMENT .

THE NEW TESTAMENT , Revealing fully and cleerly the NEW COVENANT in Christ , and the Spirituall administrations thereof , is contained in the Books written since Christs manifestation in the flesh . In Reading of the Old-Testament , the veile is untaken away : — But ( in the NEW TESTAMENT ) the veile is done away in Christ . And we all with open face , beholding as in a glasse the glory of the Lord , are changed into the same image from glory to glory . 2 Cor. 3.14.18 . in the Books of the Old Testament , God describes to us , The Old Covenant of Grace in Christ veiled under Promises , Prophecies and Types : In the Books of the New Testament The Lord delineates to us The New Covenant of Grace in Christ unveyled , actually exhibited and performed ; Christ being the body and substance of all those ancient Types and Shadowes , Iohn 1.17 . Hebr. 10.1 . Coloss. 2.17 . The Center and meeting-place of all the Prophecyes and Promises , Luke 1.70 . and 24.27 . Acts 10.43 . 2 Cor. 1.20 .

The Bookes of the New Testament are either 1 Historicall . 2 Epistolicall , or 3 Propheticall , as further appears in the annexed Table . ☞

I. HISTORICAL BOOKS .

THE HISTORICAL BOOKS of the New Testament are such a● containe principally matters of Fact , though matters of Faith and Doctrine are also interwoven . The Histories of the New Testament , are I. Of Christ the head of the Church . II. Of the Church of Christ , his body .

The HISTORY OF JESUS CHRIST himselfe is contained in the Foure Evangelists , wherein Christs Genealogy , Nativity , Life , Doctrine , Miracles , Death , Resurrection and Ascension , are described . Matthew , Mark , Luke and Iohn , are usually called by way of emphasis , The foure Evangelists , because they alone wrote the Evangelicall History of Iesus Christ . Matthew and Iohn were Apostles Matth. 10.23 . Mark 3.18 , 19. Mark and Luke were ( though not Apostles , yet ) holy Apostolicall men , the Apostles disciples , Companions and assistants in the work of the Ministry .

The generall and common Scope of these foure Histories , and of the writing of them is that which Iohn expresseth in particular , viz. That we might believe that Iesus is the Christ , the sonne of God ; and that beleeving we might have life through his name , John 20.31 . Particular ends , and occasions may be noted in the particular considerations of them .

This one History of Iesus Christ , is written by foure severall Penmen . The Reasons thereof are worthy to be inquired into .

Ancient writers ( who much please themselves with the mysteriousnesse of Numbers ) have excogitated divers ; Some fetch a Reason from the foure Rivers of Paradise . Origen . Some , from the foure rings of the Ark wherein the the Tables of the law were contained , Hieronym . Some from the foure chief , Cardinall winds Iraen . Advers. Haeres . l. 3. c. 11. Some thinke that the Gospel being to be dispersed to the whole world , the world being divided into foure chiefe parts , therefore there were foure-Evangelists , and hence this History of Christ , written by foure Evangelists , is called Sancta Quadriga Domini i. e. The Lords chariot drawn of foure , wherein Christ rides as in triumph throughout the world , to spread abroad the sweet odour of his knowledge , &c. D. Aurel. Augustin . de consensu . Evangelistarum , lib. 1. c. 5 , 6 , 7. Tom. 4. August . Expos. in Evang. Ioan. Tract . 36. Iraen . quo supra Most accommodate that of the four * * Haec autem animalia tria , sive leo , sive homo , sive vitulus in terra gradiuntur : unde isti tres Evangelistae in his maximè occupati sunt , quae Christus in carne operatus , & quae precepta mortalis vitae exercendae carnem ▪ portantibus tradidit . At vero Joannes super nubila infirmitat●s Humanae velut Aquila volat , & lucem incommutabilis veritatis acutissimis atque firmissimis o●ulis cordit in●u●tur . Aug. de consens . Evang● de 1. c. 6. Tom. 4. living creatures , Ezek ▪ 1.5 . and Rev. 4.6 . to the number of the Evangelists , but severally . Ambrose gives , the Man to Matthew , who begins with Christs pedigree ; The Lyon to Mark , who begins his History of the Lyon-like ministry of Iohn Baptist , that Evangelicall Elias , Christs immediate forerunner ; The Calfe to Luke , who begins ▪ his Gospel with the Nativity of Christ , and that in a stable , there being no room for him in the Inne ; and the Eagle to Iohn , who in the beginning of his Gospel soares aloft to that high mystery of Christs Divinity and Godhead , D. Ambros. Praefat. in Evang. secund. Luc. But leave we these notions of wit , which seem rather to be similitudes , allusions , or Allegories , used for illustration , rather then Arguments for demonstration , why these foure should write our blessed Saviours History .

We may rather conceive Christs History was written by these foure .

1. Because God , who appointed many witnesses of Christs doctrine and works , &c. not only to Ierusalem , all Iudea , and Samaria , but to the utmost parts of the earth , Act. 1.8 . & 10.39 , 41 , 24. did peculiarly stirre up these foure persons by his spirit to this work ; for holy men writ who were moved , and as moved by the Holy Ghost , 2 Pet. 1.20 , 21. 2. This History of Christ , is the History of Histories , of greatest worth in it selfe , and concernement to us : and likely to be most opposed by the Devil , & the wicked world , &c. therfore God ( that requires two or three witnesses , for confirmation of things , Deut. 17. 6. Heb. 10.28 . ) makes use of foure witnesses to write Christs story , that by the writings of foure , every thing might he established , beyond suspition . 3. That we may see the authority of the Gospel , depends not upon the Pen-men thereof , but upon the Holy Ghost that indites it , and therefore this History is written , not only by Matthew and Iohn , Apostles , who were eye and eare-witnesses of what Christ did and spake ; but also by Mark and Luke the Apostles followers , who stedfastly believed the Apostles report , Luk. 1.1 , 2. though not● eye-witnesses themselves , yet were incited thereto by the spirit . 4. That this Gospel-History might be compleated , one explaining what another left obscure , for matter or order , one supplying what another had omitted , As , Matthew , who wrote first , ( as Pareus thinks Proem . in Matth. p. 599. ) viz. in the ninth yeare after Christs ascension , for the most part relates the things done , but seldome insists upon the order of doing them . Mark who wrote next , viz. in the tenth yeare after Christs ascension , briefly relates what Matthew did more largely , ( Mark being as an Abstract , or Epitome of Matthew , ) but withall he more insists upon the ordering and timing of things done . Luke , who wrote in the fifteenth year , after Christs ascension , having seen others writings , propounds to himselfe to write of things from the very first , and that methodically ; It seemed good to me also , having had perfect understanding of things , from the very first , to write unto thee in Order , Luke 1.3 . In many things he shews the order of things by circumstances , and in most agrees with Mark , whence Tertullian cals Lukes Gospel , Digestum Historiae Evangelicae , i. e. An orderly digesting of the Evangelicall Story : but sometimes things manifest in Matthew and Mark , he puts not in their own place . Iohn who wrote his Gospel in the two and thirtieth yeare after Christs ascension , professedly , ( as Eusebius in hist. Eccles. testifies ) addes the Acts of Christ in the first yeare of his Ministry , omitted by the rest . And in the rest of his History , he not only insists much upon Christs doctrine not formerly spoken to , but also expressely notes the Feasts of certaine distinct years , incident in the time of Christs ministry , intimating that the Evangelicall History penned by others , should be distributed into certain years , according to those Feasts . 5. Finally , though the Holy Ghost could by one and the same contexture of words , have given us the History of Christs words and deeds , ( as Gerson noteth ) yet not without some great mystery therein , he pleased , sub quadam concordissima , ( si it a dicipossit ) dissonantia — i. e. under a certain Harmonious & most concording dissonancy , ( if we may so speake ) to excite the mindes of the faithfull , to the more humble and vigilant investigation of the truth ; that so it might appear , the foure Evangelists ) did not speak by mutuall Conspiration , but by divine Inspiration .

Matthew .

THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MATTHEW . The English word [ Gospel ] comes from the old Saxon word , [ Godspel ] i. e. Good speech ▪ The Greek word signifies Good-tydings , or a Good-Message : This word Gospel in New Testament , is of severall acceptations . It is used .

1. In bad sense for a false pretended Gospel , Gal. 1.6 , 7. 2. In good sense and that either 1. Properly , and so the word is used , either 1. Generally , For the Doctrine or Promise of salvation freely by Christ to all that will believe . Thus the Gospel is everlasting , Rev. 14.6 . one and the same under Old and New Testament , Gal. 3.8 . 2. Specially , for the Doctrine of grace in accomplishing the Promise by Christ exhibited , this is peculiar to the New Testament Rom. 1.1.2 . 2 Cor. 4.4 . 2. Metonymically . 1. For the Preaching , or Ministery of the Gospel , 1 Cor. 9.12.14 . 2. For the History of Christ , who is the prime Subject of the Gospel . Thus the Books of the four Evangelists are called Gospells .

This Book is called The Gospel according to Mat. because he was Penman of it . Matthew , an Hebr. name , in Syriack 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mattha , some derive it from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mas. i. e. Tribute , others from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Mathach , i. e. to extend , to explaine , &c. So that Matthew should sound as much as , An explainer , viz. of Scripture . But rather it is to be deriv'd from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Nathan i. e. he hath given or bestowed , whence 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Matthan , A gift ; so Matthew no●es a Gift , viz. of God , vid. Greg. Gregori Lexicon sanctum , Sect. 858. p. 641. Matthew was also surnamed Levi , in Hebr. i. e. associated , Mark . 2.14 . Luk. 5.29 . so he had two names . He was the sonne of Alpheus Mark. 2.14 . By profession a publicane , sitting at the Receipt of Custome , Luk. 5.27 . Mark . 2.14 . with Matth. 9.9 . his calling was very infamous among the Jews , yet Christ cals him from the Receipt of custome , to be a disciple , who presently obeyed , and made Christ a great feast , Luk. 5.27 , 28.29 . Mark 2.14 , 15. Matth. 9.9 , 10. He was one of the twelve Apostles . Matth. 10.3 . Penman of this book , Authority whereof was never questioned by the Church of Christ . He is called , A most faithfull Commentator of the Gospel , by Tertul. lib. de carne Christi , c. 22. p. 310. edit Franeher , 1597. He preached the Gospel to sinners , not only by word , but by exemplary correcting his own life ▪ Chrysost. in Praesat . oper. imperfect .

Matthew wrote his Gospel as some think in the one and twentieth yeare after Christs ascension , Iraen . l. 3. c. 1. Or the fifteenth yeare , As Nicephorus l. 2. c. 45. Or the ninth yeare after Christs ascension , as Pareus Proem . in Matth. p. 599. and Alsted in Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 123. p. 710

Occasion of Matthews Gospel , some declare thus . Matthew after he had first preached to the Hebrews , and thence was to go to the Gentiles , he committed his Gospel to writing ; that so he might supply and compensate his absence by his writing , left behind with them , Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 3 , c. 24. and out of him Nicephorus l. 2. c. 45

The language , in which Matthew wrote , some thinke was Hebrew ; tha● he being an Hebrew , wrote in Hebrew to the Hebrews , divers Ancient writers embrace this opinion , Iraen . l. 3. c. 1. Athan●s . in Synops. p. 141. Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 3. c. 24. Nazianz. in Carm. Hieron . Praefat. in 4. Evang. ad Damas. & in c. 11. Hoseae . August de consens ▪ Evang. l. 1. c. 2. Nicephor . l. 4. c. 32. And that it was translated into Greek , By Iohn the Evangelist , as some ; By Iames , as o●hers ; By Luke and Paul , as others ; By Mark , as o●hers are of opinion . Some thinke he wrote not in pure Hebrew , but in Syriack , being the Dialect then most commonly used , Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 123. But others Judge , Matthew wrote not his Gospel originally in Hebrew , but in Greek , and that upon these grounds ▪ 1. The Hebrew Gospel of Munsterus his Edition is such for language , as it is improbable it should be written by Matthew , or any other skilfull in the Hebrew tongue . 2. The same Authors who report Matthew , to have writ in Hebrew , acknowledge the Greek Gospel of Matthew in the Apostles times , to be commended to the Church as Authentick . Iren. l. 3. c. 39. Hieron . in Catal. illustr. Euseb. l. 3. c. 34. and 39. and l. 5. c. 10. &c. 3. The other Apostles originally wrote in the Greek tongue , ( as then most common ) and that not only promiscuously to all both Jewes and Gentiles , but peculiarly when they wrote to the Iewes . As Author of the Epistle to Hebrews , Peter , Iames. And their Apostolicall function required them to write in the most knowne tongue , as most to edifying . 4. Matthew's stile plainly agrees with Mark 's , differs not much from Iohn's , and though therein there be some Hebraismes , so there are in most books of the New Testament ▪ 5. Matthew interprets Hebrew names by Greek , therefore he wrote in Greek not in Hebrew , e. g. Immanuel Matth. 1.23 . Golgotha , Matth. 27.33 . Eli Eli lamasabachtani , Matth. 27.46 . 6. None can certainly tell who should be the Author of the Greek version , if Matthew wrote in Hebrew . And this opinion tends to destroy the credit and authority of Matthew's Gospel in Greek .

Stope , To evidence to all , but especially to the beleeving Hebrews , with whom he had preached , that this Iesus Christ , was the true Messiah ; the true promised seed of David and Abraham , Matth. 1.1 .

Principall parts . This History describes .

I. Christs Birth , and there , His Genealogy , Conception , Nativity , Place where , and some Consequents thereupon , c. 1.2 . II. Christs Life , wherein are deciphered , 1. The things done in reference to Christs threefold office . viz. I. Priestly ; His inauguration by Iohns publike promulgation , c. 3. II. Kingly , he combates with Sathan and conquers him , c. 4. III. Propheticall , which he executed . 1. Alone by himselfe , and that either , As a Prophet only , teaching , 1 The Causes of Godlinesse , c. 5. 2 The Duties of Godlinesse , c. 6. 3 The impediments unto Godlinesse , c. 7. As a Prophet and King joyntly , doing miracles , c. 8. and 9. 2. Together with , or by his Apostles in their mjnistry , c. 10. 2. The authority and esteem that Christ had . 1. With his owne , c. 11. 2. With others , both 1 Ecclesiasticall Persons who conferred with him , that they might ensna●e him and accuse him , c. 12. 2 And Politicall , whether with the people , who flocked no heare him preach . c. 13. Or with the Magistrate , Herods opinion of him , c. 14. III. Christs death . Set forth by the Antecedents , Manner , and Consequents of it . I. By the Antecedents of it , comprised in his journey to Ierusalem , wherein no●e , 1. Whence he went , the terme from which , viz. From Galilee , c. 15. compared with c. 19. 1. while Christ was in Galilee . 1. He answers the Pharisees and Sadduces about a signe , c. 16. 2. He is transfigured to encourage both himselfe and his Apostles against his passion , c. 17. 3. He preacheth humility and love to his disciples , c. 18. 2. What way he went , viz. through the coasts of Iudea , where are recorded his words and deeds , c. 19. and 20. 3. Whither he went , the terme to which , viz. To Ierusalem . Here are declared , 1. How he was entertained at Ierusalem , c. 21. 2. What he did there , viz. He disputed with Sadduces and Pharisees , c. 22. Accused the Pharisees of Hypocrisy , &c. c. 23. Foretold Ierusalems destruction , and the signes of his comming to Judgement , c. 24. Admonisheth all to prepare for the last judgement , and describeth it . c. 25. II. By the manner of his death , where note 1. The Preface , or Harbenger of it , his Agony in the Garden , Iudas his Treachery , &c. c. 26. 2. The Progresse made to bring him to his end , both in the Ecclesiasticall and Civil consistory . c. 27. 3. The Consummation of his passion , c. 27. III. By the Consequents of his death , c. 28.

Mark .

THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK . So denominated from Mark the Penman of it .

MARK , some derive from the Hebr. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Marak . i. e. He hath polished , &c. As Hebrewes . Others rather take it to be a Latine name ( made a Denizon in the Greek tongue ) and derived from the moneth of March , because Mark was borne in that moneth , it being usuall so to denominate men that were born in March , Probus . He was also called Iohn Act. 12.12 . & 15.37 . viz. Iohn Mark. His Father seemes not to be mentioned in Scripture . His mother was that Mary in whose house they were praying for Peter , when Peter brought out of prison by the Angel , came and knockt at the doore , Act. 12.12 . He was cousin to Barnabas , his Sisters Son , Col. 4.10 . Though he was not an Apostle , yet he was an Apostolicall man . Some think he was one of the 70 Disciples . Hieronym ▪ If so , he both heard and saw Christ . However he was the follower of Paul and Barnabas , Act. 12.25 . And they had him to their Minister , Act. 13.5 . Afterwards when there arose a sharp controversie betwixt Paul and Barnabas about Mark ; Paul and Barnabas departed a sunder , and Barnabas took Mark along with him to Cyprus , Act. 15.37 , 38 , 39. And after this ( as some thinke ) Mark lived with Peter , who cals him Marcus my sonne , 1 Pet. 5.13 . From whose mouth he wrote the Gospel , as some think , yet others are of opinion , there were two Marks , Vid ▪ Iacob . Laurent . in 1 Pet. 5.13 . Irenaeus stiles him The Disciple and interpreter of Peter . Iraen . advers. Heraes . l. 3. c. 1. p. 229. edit. Colon. 1596.

Mark wrote his Gospel two yeares after Matthew , as some think , vid. Annotat . in Irenaeum quo supr. p. 229.230 . And he wrote it upon occasion of the request of some Brethren at Rome , as some conceive . Epiphan Haeres . 51. Euseb. Eccles. Hist. l. 6. c. 11. & l. 1. c. 15. Niceph. lib. 2. c. 15. Hieron . Catal. illust . That conceit of Baronius that he wrote his Gospel in Latin , is rejected as groundlesse . Gerh. loc. com . de Sac. Script . exeg . c. 9. § . 244.

Scope ; To describe the true Christ , and to prove that Iesus is the Christ . And this he doth compendiously , as Matthew had done before more Copiously . He also notes the Series and Order of the History .

Principall parts . An Historicall Narration of Christs life , and death is orderly and compendiously laid down ; I. Christs life and conversation is described , 1. By his fore-runner Iohn Baptist , c. 1. 2. By things done by Iesus Christ , either , 1. Before his transfiguration ; as the Oracles which he preached , and the Miracles which he wrought ; The splendour and glory of both which are much augmented , both by men , and by God . I. By men , and those both Christs friends , and Christs Foes , 1. Christs friends , as By Matthewes calling to the Apostleship , c. 2. By the 12 Apostles being sent forth to preach , c. 3. By the peoples flocking together to heare Christs Doctrine , c. 4.5 . 2. Christs foes , viz , By Christs own Country-men that despised him , c. 6. By the Scribes and Pharisees , cavilling at him and his Disciples , c. 7.8 . II. By God , in his trans-figuration , c. 9. 2. In his Trans-figuration , c. 9. 3. After his trans-figuration , where we have Christs acts . 1. Before his entring into the Holy City , c. 10. 2. At his entring into Ierusalem , c. 11. 3. After his entrance , his 1. Disputation with the Scribes , Pharises , Sadduces , Herodians . c. 12. 2. Predictions of Ierusalem's destruction , and the end of the world , c. 13. II , Christs Passion and Death , is set forth , 1. By the Antecedents of it , c. 14. 2. By the manner of it , c. 15 , 3. By the Consequents of it . His Buriall , Resurrection , Ascension , &c. c. 15.16 .

Luke .

THe Gospel according to LUKE . So denominated from Luke the Penman of it ,

LUKE some account an Hebrew name 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Lokam , i. e. To him the Resurrection ; Theophilact thinkes , that Luke and Cleophas first met Christ after his Resurrection . But this is lesse probable , because Luke testifies , that he wrote this History of Christ , according as things were delivered to him by Ministers of the word , that were eye-witnesses — Luke 1.1.2 . Others rather count Luke a Latin name from Lucius . Lucius derived a Luce Oriente , i. e. from the morning light , they were wont to impose this name upon such as were borne in the morning , about Sun-rising , &c. He was of Antioch in Syria , as Hieronym . and Theophylact. By particular vocation , a Physician , Luke the beloved Physition , Col. 4.14 . And some think he was a most excellent Painter . Niceph. l. 6. c. 16. & l. 15. c. 14. He was a faithfull and constant companion of Paul , 2 Tim. 4.11 . His fellow labourer , Philem. 24. And some think Luke is intended by that brother whose praise is in the Gospel throughout all the Churches , 2 Cor. 8.18 . Bez. in loc. intimates this was Hierom's opinion . Though Chrysostome rather thinks it was Barnabas , to whom Calvin subscribes , Calv. in loc. Piscat in loc. Luke was an inseparable Companion of Paul and his fellow-worker in the Gospel ; saith Irenalis l. 3. c. 14. Pauls follower ; and though not an Apostle , yet Apostolicall ; saith Tertull. advers. Marcion . l. 4. c. 2. That Luke was most skilfull in the Greek tongue , not onely Hieronym . in Isaiah c. 6. testifies ; but also his very stile cleerly evidenceth . Whereupon one saith , It is known to the learned , that Luke observed a more pure Hellenisme then the rest of the Evangelists , Causab . Exerc. 2. c. 1. Paul converted Luke at The●es , think Hieronym . Eusebius ▪ and Niceporus . Luke lived a single life , and taught first in France , Italy , Macedonia , and Dalmatia ; thinks Epiphan. His death is variously reported ; he lived 84 yeares saith Hieron . in Catal. and then dyed in Bithynia . Hicrony . in Catal. At Ephesus , thinks Dorotheus . He was hanged on a fruitfull Olive-tree ; thinks Nicephorus .

He wrote his Gospel about fifteene yeeres after Christs Ascension Niceph. and that in the parts of Achaiah , Hieronym .

Occasion of his writing , some say was the appointment of Peter or Paul , that 's doubtfull . Probably the request of Theophilus ( supposed to be some eminent Senator ) to whom he directs both his Gospel , and the Acts. Though some take this name Theophilus , for any go●ly man , Lover of God . Luke himselfe cleerely sets down one occasion , viz. The unsuccessefull attempts of many who wrote false Gospels , Luke 1.1.2 .

Scope , Besides the generall ayme of all the Evangelists , Luke seemes particularly to intend to supply what others had omitted , and to record thing● from the very first , and that methodically in order ; that Theophilus might know the certainty of things wherein he had been instructed , Luke 1.3 , 4.

Principall parts . In Lukes Evangelical History , are , I. The Preface to the whole History c. 1. v. 1 , 2 , 3 , 4. II. The Body of the History it selfe , which containes a Narration of , I. Christs life , Private or publique . 1. Private where 1. Of things before his Nativitie , and of his conception , c. 1. 2. Of his Nativity it selfe , and his education , c. 2. 2. Publique in the Ministery of the Gospel , where are , I. His instalment into his publique Ministry , c. 3. II. His executing of his Ministry . 1. By himselfe alone , both in teaching , c. 4. and in acting , c. 5. 2. By his Disciples also , which Disciples are either , Primary , the 12 Apostles called and instructed , c. 6 , 7 , 8. And sent forth , ● . 9. Or secondary , as the 70 Disciples sent to preach , c. 10. II. Christs Death is described . 1. By the Antecedents of it , viz. Christs words and workes in his journey to Hierusalem ; here are considerable , 1. The terme from which Christ went , from Galile c. 9. v. 51. 2. His passage it selfe , wherein Christ discoursed of Gods worship and service , inward , and outward . 1. Inward , as 1. Prayer , c. 11. 2. Faith , c. 12. 3. Repentance , whereof are laid down , The Motives c. 13. The impediments , c. 14. The effects or fruits , c. 15. 2. Outward , viz. 1. Of eschewing evil , i. e. The abuse of riches c. 16. And scandall c. 17. 2. Of doing good duties , c. 18. 3. The terme to which he came , viz. to Ierusalem , where of his 1. Entertainment c. 19. 2. Disputation , c. 20. 3. Prophecy c 21. 2 , By the manner of it . Beginning of his Passion , c. 22. Progresse c. 23. Period , c. 23. 3. By the consequents of his death , c. 24.

John .

THe Gospel according to JOHN . This book is thus intituled from the Penman of it , viz. Not Iohn the Baptist ( as he is surnamed Luke 1.63 . ) Nor Iohn surnamed Marke , Act. 15.37 . but Iohn the Apostle , compare Matth. 10.2 . with John 21.20 , 24. This is the Disciple which testifyeth of these things , and wrote these things . He wrote also three Epistles ; and the Revelation in Patmos . JOHN is Originally an Hebrew name , viz. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Iochanan . 1 Chron 12.22 . Ierem. 40.13 . it is also sometimes written 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 I●hochanan , as in 1 Chron. 26.3 . It is compounded of 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Iehovah , the proper and essentiall name of God , and 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 chanan i. e. He hath been gracious ; whence comes 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 chen i. e. Grace ; so that IOHN imports , THE LORD HATH BEEN GRACIOUS ; or , THE GRACE OF THE LORD . This Iohn was the sonne of Zebedee , and brother of Iames , all of them Fishermen by trade : Matth. 4.21 . and 10.2 . Mark 1.19 . Luke 5.10 . Salome ( mentioned Mark 15 40. and 16.1 . ) is supposed to be Iohn's mother . As Iohn was with his Father , and Brother in the Ship , mending their nets , Jesus called him and his Brother , Matth. 4.21 . Luke 5.10 . It is thought that Iohn lived a single life : yet some are of opinion that Iohn was the Bridegroome at Cana in Galilie . Ioh. 2.1.9 . It is certain ; that Iohn was one 1 of the three whom Christ took up with him to mount Tabor to behold his trans-figuration , Matth. 17.1 . &c. Mark 9.2 . Luke 9.28 . &c. And ᶻ one of the two , whom Christ sent to prepare his last Passeover , Luke 22.8 . And 3 that Disciple whom Iesus peculiarly loved above all the rest , Ioh. 13.23 . and 19.26 . and 20.2 , & 21.7.20 . ⁴ Who leaned on Iesus breast at supper ; and 5 to whom Christ by a private token discovered that Iudas should betray him , Ioh. 13.23 , 24 , 25 , 26. And 6 to whom Christ dying on the Crosse , commenced his own mother , Ioh. 19.25 , 26 , 27. After Christs Ascension , Iohn , with Peter , healed miraculously the lame man as they were going into the Temple , Act. 3.3 , 4 , &c. Preached boldly against all prohibitions , Act. 4.13 , 19. Was sent to Samaria having received the word , from the Apostles at Ierusalem , Acts 8.14 . Tertullian saith , that the Apostle Iohn , after he in Rome had been cast into burning Oyle , and suffered nothing thereby , was banished into an Iland Tertul. lib. de Praescriptione adversus Haereticos cap. XXXVI . p. 211 edit. Franeker . 1597. Nero slung him into the burning Oyle , as is thought : Domitian Banished him into the Isle Patmos Rev. 1.9 , 10. Whence it s supposed , he returned under Nerva ; came to Ephesus in the 97 yeere of his age , where he lived and taught till he was 99. He made his Sepulcher with his own hands . Left his Disciples , Papias at Ierusalem ; Policarpus at Smyrna ; and Ignatius at Antioch . He is supposed to write his Gospel towards the end of his life . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 123. Iohn's Gospel hath still been had of most high account with Antiquity . See Basil. in Homil. sub Princ. Ioan. Chrysost in Prolog . Comment. super Ioan ▪ Ambros. l. 3. de sacram . c. 2. Cyrill in Prolog . Ioan. Hieronym . Proem . Comment. in Matth. August . de Civit. dei . l. 10. c. 29. and Tract . 56. in Ioan.

Occasion of Iohn's writing his Gospel , Ecclesiasticall Writers tels us was twofold . viz. 1. To oppose and confute the blasphemous heresies of Ebion and Cerinthus , who denyed the Divinity of Christ ; hence Iohn so clearly asserts it , Iohn . 1. See Iren. Advers. haeres . l. 3. c. 11. p. 257. edit. Colon. 1596. Hieronym , in Proem . Comment. in Matth. 2. To supply what the other three Evangelists had omitted , who principally relate things done by Christ , but for one yeare wherein Christ suffered , after Iohn was cast into prison , Euseb. Hist l. 6. c. 13. ex Clem. Alexandr .

Scope of Iohn's writing is expressely noted , Iohn 20.31 . These are written that yee might believe that Iesus is the Christ , the sonne of God , and that believing yee might have life through his name .

The Principall parts , or Generall Branches of this Hist. are , I. A Description of Christs Person according to his divine and humane nature , c. 1. II. A Delineation of Christs office , discharged by him in his foure ominent journeys to Ierusalem , viz. 1. At the feast of the Passeover , John 2.12 , 13. Here are considerable 1. The terme whence he went , from Cana of Galilee , c. 2. 2. His abode there , the doctrine that he preached , and the Acts he did , c. 2.14 . &c. and ● 3 , and 4.1 , 2 , 3. 3. His returne from Ierusalem through Samaria , and his deeds and act● there , c. 4. 2. At the feast of Pentecost ▪ wherein 1. He cured him that had the palsie thirty eight years , c. 5. 2. He fed the multitude aboue five thousand with five loaves and two fishes , and preached himselfe the true Mannah , c 6. 3. At the feast of Tabernacles , where are 1. Christs comming to Ierusalem , c. 7 , 1. to 15. 2. His abode there ; during which , he taught , c. 7 , 14. to the end . He disputed , c. 8. He cured the man borne blinde , c. 9. He preached himselfe , the true shepheard of his sheep , c. 10. 3. His returne thence beyond Iordan , c. 10.40 . &c , whence he came againe into Iudea to Bethany , to raise Lazarus from the dead , c. 11. 4. At the Celebration of the true Passeover , when Christ our Passeover was sacrificed for us . Where Christs death is described by the Antecedents , Manner , and Consequents of it . 1. By the Antecedents going before his death , viz. 1. His actions , entring into the City , c. 12. Washing his disciples feet at supper , c. 13. 2. His words spoken , either At supper , c. 13 , 31. to the end , and c. 14. as they were going to the garden of Gethsemane , 1 Warning his disciples of the worlds persecution , c. 15. 2 Comforting them against the Crosse , c. 16. 3 Praying for them and all his Elect , c. 17. 2. By the manner of his Passion , 1. In the garden , c. 18 , 1. to 15. 2. In the High-Priests palace , c. 18 , 15. to 28. 3. In the Hall of judgement before Pilate , c. 18 , 28. to c. 19. v. 17. 4. In the place of execution , c. 19. ver. 17. to the end . 3. By the Consequents of his Passion , viz. Christs appearing after his Resurrection , 1. To Mary Magdalene and the disciples in Iudea , c. 20. 2. To the disciples fishing in Galilee , c. 21.

The Acts :

THE HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF CHRIST , his body , and that in the purest Primitive Apostolicall times , is contained in the Acts OF THE HOLY APOSTLES . So denominated from the principall subject matter of this Book , viz. The Acts of the Apostles in the infancy of the Primitive Church , therein recorded Historically .

Penman of this History was Luke the beloved Physitian , who also wrote the Gospel ( of whom see what is there spoken ) as appears 1. By the Preface or Introduction here prefixed , wherein he mentions the former Treatise of the Gospel penned by him ; names Theophilus to whom he directed particularly this History of the Apostles , as well as that History of Christ ; and also he connects or knits this Book to his Gospel , by continuing the History where he formerly left . viz. At the Resurrection and Ascension of Iesus Christ , which here is somewhat more fully described , and what followed thereupon , Act. 1.1 , 2. So that his Gospel , and the Acts of the Apostles are but as one continued History . 2. By the very stile , which seems notably to indigitate Luke unto us , partly it being compleat and polished Greek becomming Luke an accurate Grecian , who had also most diligently perused the Septuagint version ; partly it being replenished with Hebraismes , suitable to Luke's native Genius , being by country a Syrian of Antioch , ( the Syrian language being one of the Hebrew dialects ) partly because herein somtimes is the Language of a Physitian , very agreeable to Lukes profession , as Act. 17.16 . His spirit was stirred in him . 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. His spirit was in a Paroxysme ; the word is used by Physitians to signifie a sharp fit of an ague , fever , &c. & again , the Contention was so sharp , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. there befell a Paroxysme , — this word is not used in all the New Testament by any , but Luke , and Paul , ( whose companion Luke was ) 1 Cor. 13.5 . Heb. 10.24 . 3. By the consent of ancient and moderne writers . No doubt this Book was written by Luke of Antioch , the Physitian , Hieron in Praefa● . Act. Luke the follower of the Apopostle and companion of all his Travell , wrote the Gospel , — and put forth also another excellent volume entituled the Acts of the Apostles . Hieronym . de vir illustr . And againe , the Acts , of the Apostles seem to import a bare history of the infancy of the new-born Christ , but if we know Luke the Physi●ian to be the penman of them , whose praise is in the Gospel , we shall consider also that all his words are a medicine for a languishing soule . Hieron . praefat. in Act. and out of him Beda , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The book of the Acts which Luke wrote . Oecumen . in Scholiis . None but the unlearned and unskilfull , can doubt whether Luke were Penman of the Acts , &c. Erasmus .

Occasion . It is thought that Luke wrote this History at Rome , during Pauls imprisonment there . Hieron . de vir illustr . And that at the request of the faithfull brethren at Rome : and by the command of Paul , Dorotheus and Nicephor . Hist. l. 2. c. 43. Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 123. The time of writing is referred to the sixtieth year of Christ , the fourth of Nero , 27th . after Pauls conversion . But the peculiar guidance of the Holy Ghost , was the principall cause of Lukes writing both this and the former Book .

Scope . To describe unto us the Rise , Growth , State and practice of the Primitive Christian Church in her infancy , in the purest Apostolicall times , how she observed and obeyed Christs Commandements to his Apostles , after his Resurrection and before his Ascension , speaking to them of the things pertaining to the Kingdome of God , Acts 1.2 , 3. and this both in matters of faith , worship , Church-Communion , and Church-Government ; that herein the Primitive Church might be an exemplary Patterne to the following Churches in all succeeding ages . So that this is a most usefull Book to the Church of God .

Principall branches . The Acts of the Apostles , are laid down in this History , 1. More generally . The Acts of all the Apostles . I. After Christs Resurrection , till his Ascension , c. 1 , 1. to 12. II. After Christs Ascension till the feast of Pentecost . viz. Their devotion , and their Election of Matthias to the Apostleship in room of Iudas , c. 1 , 12. to the end . III. At the feast of Pentecost , how they preached and walked after they had extraordinarily received the Holy-Ghost , c. 2. IIII. After the feast of Pentecost , viz. 1. How the Apostles , ( upon report of the miracle that Peter and Iohn had wrought upon the lame man , and the doctrine they had boldly taught , against all the oppositions and threats of the Priests and Elders ) powred forth their prayers against the enemies of Christ and his Gospel . c. 3 , 4. to 32. 2. How themselves provided for the necessities of Christians that wanted , c. 4 , 32. to c. 5. 3. How they wrought wonders to the conversion of many , c. 5 , 12. to 17. 4. How the Apostles were imprisoned and beaten for preaching Iesus Christ , and how stoutly they behaved themselves under these sufferings . c. 5 , 17. to the end . 5. How thu● Apostles appointed seven Deacons to take care of the poore , whereof Steven being one , wrought miracles , disputed , was accused , answered his Accusation , and is barbarously stoned to death , c. 6. & 7. 6. How the Apostles continuing at Ierusalem , in the great persecution occasioning the dispersion , sent Peter and Iohn to Samaria to preach to them . The Holy Ghost also sending Philip to baptize the Ethiopian Eunuch , and to preach , c. 8. In which persecution , Saul being a great actor , was wonderfully converted and called to the Apostleship , c. 9 , 1. to v. 32. 2 More specially . The Acts of Peter and Paul are storied . I. Peters acts . viz. 1. His miracles wrought , recovering Aeneas and raising Dorcas from death , c. 9 , 32. to the end . 2. His doctrine , preached to Cornelius a Gentile , c. 10. Defended against them of the circumcision , that opposed his communion with the uncircumcised , c. 11. 3. His imprisonment and miraculous release , c. 12. II. Pauls Acts are recorded according to foure remarkable per●grinations or journeys which he took ; viz. 1. His first journey was with Barnabas , to the Gentiles . His Deeds and Acts in that journey , are in c. 13.14 . 2. His second journey with Silas , from Antioch to Ierusalem , where 1. The occasion of the journey , viz. the doctrine of certaine comming from Ierusalem , That circumcision was necessary to salvation ; whereupon that famous Synod was called at Ierusalem , c. 15. 2. Pauls Deeds and Acts , while he was in Asia , c. 16. 3. Pauls Deeds and Acts while he abode in Graecia , untill he returned againe to Antioch , c. 17. to c. 18. vers. 22. 3. His third journey undertaken for the Ephisians sakes , where note 1. Whence he went . c. 18.23 , &c. 2. What way he travelled , Going , c. 19. Comming , c. 20 3. Whither he came , viz. to Ierusalem . c. 21.22 , 23. Then to Cesarea , where consider things done under Felix , c. 24. under , Festus , c. 25. under ●grippa , c. 26. 4 His fourth and last Journey which he took towards Rome , c. 27 , 28.

II. EPISTOLICAL BOOKS .

THE EPISTOLICAL BOOKS of the New Testament , are , All the Epistles , written by the Apostles ; the Apostles being oft-times unable to instruct by their personall presence , supplyed that by writing Epistles . These Epistles are either written , 1. To the Beleeving Gentiles , Or 2. To the Beleeving Iews ; as was formerly noted ,

To the beleeving Gentiles , The Apostle Paul wrote his Epistles , which are either 1. Generall written to whole Churches : Or 2. Particular to some select particular persons . Some do rank Pauls Epistles thus , according to the persons to whom they were written , viz.

Pauls Epistles were written either To whole Churches , either in Europe , as to the Churches at Rome . — in Italie . Corinth . in Grecia Thessalonica in Grecia Philippi . — in Thracia Asia , as to the Churches at Galatia in Asia Minor Ephesus in Asia Minor Colosse in Asia Minor Iudea , and in other Nations dispersed , as the Epistle to the Hebrewes . To particular persons ; as to Timothy . Titus . Philemon .

Others endeavour , and that not unprofitably to marshall Pauls Epistles , in the Order of times and seasons , wherein they were severally written , which Order is not observed as they are placed in our Bibles . And though the punctuall time when every Epistle was written , cannot evidently and infallibly be demonstrated either by the Epistles themselves , or other Ecclesiasticall Histories , yet we may have good probabilities hereof , as may appeare in this Type or Table ensuing , viz.

Pauls Epistles were written , 1. Before his Bonds and Captivity at Rome . 2. In his Bonds and Imprisonment there .

I. Before his Bonds and Captivity at Rome , as these seven Epistles in this Order , viz. 1. First of all seems to be written the I. To Thessal . From Athenes by Tychicus . For Paul by reason of the tumultuous Jews going from Thessalonica to Berea , and thence to Athenes Act. 17. thence he confirmes the Thessalonians in the faith by his first Epistle , written about seventeen years after his Conversion , ninth yeare of Claudius , and nineteenth yeare after Christs passion , when the Councell at Ierusalem was held . Hieron . 2. About the same time , and in the same place Paul seemes to have written the II. To Thessal . by Tychicus also . For what he had written in the former of Christs coming , and of the end of the world , he further explaines in this , and vindicates . 3. The I. To Timothy seems written by Paul , from Laodicea , of Phrygia Palatina , sent by Tychicus the Deacon , when returning the second time from Ierusalem , he passed through the Region of Galatia and Phrygia , Acts 18.23 . and before he returned to Ephesus , Acts 19.1 . For he promiseth to Timothy , that he would shortly come thither . 1 Tim. 3.14 . viz. in the nineteenth yeare after his Conversion , ( as is thought ) in the eleventh of Claudius , and the one and twentieth after Christs death . 4. Next seems written the I. To Corinth , from Ephesus , while Paul stayed there , Act. 19.9 . ( and this rather then from Philippi , as the Greek postscript intimates , ) and before he went through Macedonia , ) 1 Cor. 16.5 . for he passed through Macedonia , after his three years abode at Ephesus . See Acts 19.1.8.10 . compared with Act. 20.1 . about the end of which time he is supposed to write this Epistle at Ephesus before Pentecost . For he saith , I will tarry at Ephesus , until Pentecost ; 1 Cor. 16.8 . which when he wrote , he seems plainly to be at Ephesus : And this Pentecost went before that Pentecost , when he intended to be at Ierusalem , Act. 20.16 . which fell out about the sixty fourth yeare after Christs death , in the ninth of Nero , which yeare coming to Ierusalem with the Contribution , he was cast into Bonds , in the thirtieth yeare after his Conversion , Athanas. in Synops. Chrysostome . 5. Not much after this first Epistle , Paul wrote his II. To Corinth , from Philippi when after Demetrius his tumult , he left Ephesus and came into Macedonia , Acts 20.1 , 2 , 3. for then he must needs come to Philippi , ( which was the first city upon the coast of Macedonia , Act. 16.12 . ) Hither referre that promise of his that he would come to Corinth , with them of Macedonia , 2 Cor. 9.4 . that is there said to be done , when after he had passed thorough Macedonia into Greece , he had stayed three moneths , Ast. 20.2 , 3. and after , we never read that he returned into Greece . 6. In the same passing through Macedonia ; At Nicopolis not farre distant from Philippi , before he came into Greece , Paul is supposed to have written his Epistle To Titus whom he cals from Creet to Nicopolis , because there he had determined to winter , Tit. 3.12 . though he seems after to have altered his purpose , and to have wintred in Grecia , as is thought at Corinth . 7. The eminent Epistle to the Romanes seems to have been written , whilst Paul was wintring at Corinth . For after that , we read not that he returned to Corinth , but having wintred in Greece because of the treacheries of the Jewes , returning through Macedonia , he came into Syria with the Contribution , whence at last he was carried bound to Rome , in the sixty fourth yeare of Christ , the ninth of Nero , and in the thirtieth year after his own Conversion . So that the II. To Corinth , To Titus , and To the Romans , all these three seems to bewritten , as is said , and all within the space of halfe a yeare : but the Epistle to the Romans seems to be the last he wrote before he came captive to Rome . Origen & Chrysost prove it was written after both the Epistles to Corinth : because in both those Epistles he stirs them up to a Collection for the poor Saints at Ierusalem , 1 Cor. 16.1 . to 6. 2 Cor. 8. and 9. which contribution he saith he had received from the Churches of Macedonia and Achaia , Rom. 15.25 . to carry it into Iudea ; and he brought it to Ierusalem , in his last journey into Syria , described Act. 20. and 21. as himselfe testifies in his Apology before Felix , Act. 24.17 . II. In his Bonds and imprisonment at Rome , and this under , 1. His former . 2. His later imprisonment . I. Vnder his former imprisonment , when he was in more free custody at his first coming to Rome Act. 28.16 , 20 , 30 , 31. Then probably he wrote his Epistle to the Hebrewes , for he promiseth the Hebrews to come and see them , Heb. 13.23 . therefore then he had some hopes of liberty , or it may be he had liberty at that time and preached in Italy . whence perhaps the Epistle is said to be written , not from Rome , but from Italy . II. Vnder his latter imprisonment when he was clapt up in close● restraint . Then he wrote his other six Epistles ( in which he mentions his chains ) and probably he wrote them in this order , viz. 1. To the Galatians to whom he writes that he beares in his body the mark●● of the Lord Iesus , Gal. 6.17 . i. e. either his chaines , torments , or brands . 2. To the Ephesians , to whom he mentions his chain , Eph. 6.20 . 3. To the Philippians , whom he salutes in the name of divers of Caesar's houshould , Phil. 4.22 , 4. To the Colossians whom he requests to remember his bonds , Colossians 4.18 . 5 , To Philemon , Paul wrote being a Prisoner and now aged , Phil. 9. and it is thought he wrote this Epistle after his first Apology , in which all men forsook him , but the Lord stood by him , and delivered him from the mouth of the Lyon , 2 Tim. 4.17 . Therefore having some dawnings of hope that he should be delivered , he desires Philemon to prepare him a lodging , for I trust ( saith he ) that through your prayers I shall be given unto you , Phil. 22. but the Lord had otherwise determined . Some think this Epistle was written after the II to Timothy , because there he bids Timothy and Mark to come to him , whom here he intimates to be with him , ver. 1.24 . But others collect rather the contrary , 1 Partly because here he desires a lodging to be provided for him , ver. 22. but in that Epistle he is not solicitous about his lodging , but about his departure out of this life , 2 Tim. 4.6 . 2 Partly because , there he complains that Demas had forsaken him , 2 Tim. 4.10 . But here he salutes Philemon in Demas his name , ver. 24. Therefore this Epistle was written before Demas his desertion , or Demas had returned againe unto him . 6. Last of all , a little before his Martyrdome ( whichfell out in the thirty seventh yeer of Christ , in the fourteenth yeer of Nero , & in the thirty fifth yeer after his own conversion ) Paul wrote his II. to Timothy , as all Circumstances evince , and the Epistle it selfe intimates . I am now ready to be offered , and the time of my departure is at hand , 2 Tim. 4.6 .

This noting the severall times of the Apostles writing his Epistles is usefull , To let us see why the Apostle wrote so variously about the same things , as Circumcision and other Ceremonies , As ; To the Romanes , that they should receive the weake , &c. about Ceremonies and indifferent things , Rom. 14. 1. &c. But to the Galatians , and Colossians , utterly condemns use of Circumcision , &c. Gal. 5.2 . &c. Col. 2 , the reason is the difference of times , Chrisostome . Ceremonies were alwayes Mortales , mortall ; at Christs death became Mortuae , dead ; onely Moses must be honourably buried , for the weak Iewes the use of them was permitted a while ; but after that they became Mortiferae , deadly to them that used them .

But here Pauls Epistles shall be considered according to the method and distribution of all the Books of the New Testament first proposed : and that the rather , because so we shall view them as they stand in order in our Bibles .

And first of Pauls Generall Epistles to whole Churches , which are nine , viz.

Romanes .

THe Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the ROMANES . So denominated , 1. Partly from the object to whom the Epistle is written , viz. The believing Romanes , Rom. 1.7 . When this Epistle was written , there was so famous a Church at Rome , that their Faith was spoken of throughout the whole World , Rom. 1.8 . Yea there were even in Caesars houshould that had received the faith . Phil. 4.22 . But by whom or when was the Church of the Romanes first planted ? Answ. Scripture is silent , Papists say by Peter , Bel●●m . de Pont. Rom. l. 2. c. 2. But Peter never was at Rome , much lesse planted the Church there D. Pareus in Rom. 16. Pub. II. Barnabas is supposed to have preached Christ at Rome , and to have converted the Romanes , under the Reign of Tyberius , if Clement may be believed . Recognition . Clementis lib. 1. But now Rome is as infamous as once it was famous , being the seat of Antichrist , Rev. 17 , 9 , &c. the Spirituall Egypt Rev. 11.8 . Sodome Rev. 11.8 . And Babylon devoted to destruction , Rev. 18.2 , &c. 2. Partly from the Penman of the Epistle , viz. Paul , Rom. 1.1 .

PAUL is a Latin name from Paulus , i. e. a little one , so the Romanes were wont to call them that were of a lesser stature , he seemes most to be delighted with this Romane name , being appointed Apostle to the Gentiles . Some think he first had this name given him , upon occasion of his conversion of Sergius Paulus the Deputy , Act. 13.7.9.12 ▪ Hieronym . de claris Script , Before he was called Saul , i. e. desired , asked , &c. From the Hebrew 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Shaal , i. e. he hath asked , desired , &c. It is not likely that he changed his name Saul into Paul : but rather that he had two names , as all the Iews had that were freemē of Rome ; Saul then denoted his nation and Religion , Paul signified his Roman freedome . And Scripture favours this that he had two names , saying , Saul , which also is Paul , Act. 13.9 . The History of Paul is notably described in the New Testament , especially in Phil. 3. 1 Tim ▪ 1. And in Act. 13. to the end of the Book , but more summarily , Act. 22.3 , to 22. and 26.4 . to 24. He was a Iew by Nation ; of the Tribe of Benjamin ; of the Province of Cilicia ; borne in the City Tarsus , ( which being a Colony and having the priviledge of the Romane freedome , Paul though of Iewish Parents , yet saith he was a Roman free-born , Act. 22.7.28 . ) circumcised the eighth day ; brought up at the feet of Gamaliel ; a great proficient above many in the Iewish Religion ; in his Zeale persecuting all that seemed to oppose it ; held the garments of those that stoned Stephen , consenting to his death ; made havock of the Church , &c. But at last , as he was in his Circuit of persecution , he was miraculously converted of a Wolfe to become a Lamb , and of a Persecuter to be a prime Apostle , in his Apostleship he suffered and laboured more then all the rest of the Apostles ; was peculiarly sent to teach the Gentiles . At last he was carryed bound to Rome , and there he was be headed by Nero in seventeenth yeere after Christ's Ascension , in the fourteenth yeer of Nero , and thirty fifth yeere after his conversion , and buried in the Ostiense way . Hieronym . He wrote fourteen Epistles , of which one said , As oft as I read Paul , me thinks I heare not words so much as thunders , Paulum quotiesc●nque lego , videor mihi non verba au●dire , sed tonitrua . Hieronym . contr. Iovinian . de Epist. Paulin.

His Epistle to the Romanes , though no● first written , yet is set first . 1. By reason of the dignity of the Romanes to whom it was written , Rome being the Seate of the Empire , and Head of the World . 2. Because of the largenesse of the Epistle , this being the longest of all the Epistles . As Isaiah is set first being the longest of all the Prophets . 3. But especially from the dignity of the matter , and dexterity in handling it . The Body of Divinity is so admirably herein handled , espicially the principall points of Election , Reprobation , Redemption , Faith and Iustification by Faith , &c. that it is deservedly called by some Clavis Theologiae , the Key of Divinity ; and Methodus Scripturae , the Method of Scripture .

When it was written , See in former Table . Where it was written , is to be considered . Origen in Praefat. Comment . thinks at Corinth . 1. Because he commends Phaebe to the Romans , Rom. 16.1 . She was a servant to the Church at Cenchrea , which is a Port of Corinth . 2. Because he salutes them in the name of Gaius his Host , &c. Rom. 16.23 . And Gaius a Corinthian , and there Baptized by Paul 1 Cor. 1.14 . 3. Because he salutes them in the name of Erastus Chamberlaine of the City , Rom. 16.23 . Who abode at Corinth , 2 Tim. 4.20 . 4. The postscript testifies thus much .

Occasion and Scope of this Epistle seemes to be this . The report that Paul had received of some disagreements both in judgement and affection , in them of the Church of Rome , who were partly believing Jewes , partly believing Gentiles . The Iewes either wholly opposing the Gospel , or mingling Law and Gospel together in the case of Justification ▪ and all of them excluding the Gentiles from the fellowship of Christ , and despising them , insisting too much upon the Prerogative of the Jew : Contrariwise the Gentiles , knowing that the Jewes were rejected of God , and the Gentiles implanted in their stead , too much insulted over them as a people cast away , boasting of their own wisdome and vertues , and using their Christian liberty with offence . Now to reconcile these Controversies , and to settle them both in the truth , and in unity of judgement and affection , the Apostle being hindred from coming to them deals by letters ; Demonstrating that neither Iewes had cause to boast of their righteousnesse and Prerogatives , nor Gentiles of their wisdome : both of them naturally being liable to eternal condemnation notwithstanding , and both of them being to be justified by Faith in Christ alone , and that they should not abuse Grace , but walke in newnesse of life , &c.

Generall parts . In this Epistle to the Romanes are chiefly three parts .

I. A Preface to the whole Epistle , c. 1.1 . to 17 , II. A Treatise , contayning the main substance of the Epistle , which is either , Informatory and Doctrinall . or Hortatory , and Practicall . 1. Doctrinall , viz , Touching the cause of our justification , more neere , more remote . 1. More neere cause of justification Where , 1. The false cause , viz. Works , is removed , c. 1.17 . to end . c. 2. & 3.1 , to ver . 21. 2. The true cause , viz. Faith , is 1. Defended from Calumnies , c. 2.21 . to the end , & c. 3. 2. Confirmed by Abrahams example , and testimonies , c. 4. 3. Explicated by the fruits or effects thereof ; 1. Inward , viz. Peace with God , and full assurance of Faith , c. 5. 2. Outward , viz. 1 Newnesse of life , c. 6. 2 Freedom from the curse of the Law , c. 7. 3 Constancy in the state of Grace , against all condemnation , notwithstanding al infirmities or afflictions , within or without them that are in Christ , c. 8. 2. More Remote cause of justification viz. Predestination where , of 1. The Jewes rejection , described , 1. By the cause thereof , Gods pleasure , the Jewes unbeliefe , c. 9. 2. By the signes and effects thereof , their blindnesse c. 10. 2. The Jewes Restauration , and of the remnant to be saved , c. 11. 2. Practicall and Hortatory , inciting to good-works , and duties ; either , 1. Generall , towards God and man , c. 12. 2. Speciall duties , either in 1. Things necessary , towards Superiours , c ▪ 13 ▪ 2 Things indifferent and Arbitrary , towards inferiours , and the more infirm in Faith , c. 14. & , c. 15. ver. 1. to 14. III. A conclusion of the whole Epistle , consisting of 1 Excuses about his freedome in writing to them , his not coming to them ; and other advertisements touching his purpose of seeing them , and his desires of their prayers , c. 15. ver. 14. to the end . 2. Commendations and Salutations , c. 16.

I Corinth :

THe first Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the CORINTHIANS .

So denominated from the Penman thereof , Paul ( of whom in Epistle to the Romanes ) and from the object to whom he wrote it , viz. The Corinthians ; or the Church of God at Corinth , 1 Cor. 1.1 , 2. CORINTH was an eminent City of Achaia ( which Achaia by an Isthmus was annexed to Greece , neer to Athens ) seated in an Isthmus , or a little tract of Land betwixt two Seas , the Aegean and Ionian Sea , A most famous Mart , very populous , and flowing with wealth , it was Lumen & decus totius Graeciae . Cic. pro leg . Manil. i. e. The Light and glory of all Greece : yet very infamous for luxury and multitudes of vices . Once utterly destroyed by L. Mummius the Roman Consul ; but after for the opportunity of situation restored to its ancient splendour by Augustus . D. Pareus in prolegom . in I ad Corinth . Paul coming from Athens to Corinth , laid the first foundation of a Church there , 1 Cor. 3.10 . He was the●r Spirituall Father that begot them , 1 Cor. 4.15 . Converting , by his preaching , Crispus and Sosthenes chiefe Rulers of the Jewish Synagogue there ; and many other Corinthians ; among whom Paul continued preaching , a yeare and six Moneths ; God assuring him by night in a Vision , that he had much people in that City . Act. 18.1 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 , 17. And this Church of Corinth grew one of the most eminen● Churches for all manner of spirituall gifts , 1 Cor. 1.5 , 6 , 7.

When and where this Epistle was written , See in the Table before Epistle to Romanes . As the Epistle to Romanes is set first for Doctrine of Faith : So this is set second for Doctrine of Church-government , excellently handled therein .

Occasion of writing this Epistle , seemes to be twofold . 1. The information that Paul had from them of the House of Cloe , of the many and wofull distempers that infested the Church of Corinth after Paul's departure , as 1 Schismes and Divisions 1 Cor. 1.11 . &c. 2 Many notorious scandals , as Lusts , Incest , Covetousnesse , Law-suits , &c. 1 Cor. 5. & 6. 3 Idolatrous Communion with Infidels in their Idoll-feasts , 1 Cor. 8. & 10. 4 Vncomely habits in publique Assemblies , 1 Cor. 11.3 , to 17. 5 Prophanations of the Lords Supper , 1 Cor. 11.17 . to the end . 6 Barbarous confusion in their publique Church-Assemblies , 1 Cor. 14. And 7 finally such Epicure-like profanesse , as to deny the Resurrection and eternall life , 1 Cor. 15.12 , &c. 2. The writing of some of the Corinthians unto the Apostle for satisfaction in some particular cases , as 1 about Marriage . 2 About Things sacrificed to Idols . 3 About Spirituall gifts . 4 About Prophesying . And 5 about charitable Collections for the Saints in Iudea . 1 Cor. 7.1 .

Scope . The Apostle therefore in this Epistle principally endeavours , To apply healing medicines speedily to all the evils and maladies that began to grow in that Church ; and to give them satisfactory Resolutions in all the particulars , wherein they craved his advise from the Lord .

Generall parts . In this I. Epistle to Corinthians , consider I. The exordium or Preface to the whole Epistle , c. 1. v. 1. to 10. II. A Treatise of severall subjects , according as the present state and necessity of the Church required , in respect of their present corruptions abounding ; and Paul's Resolution in some doubts propounded . Herein therefore the Apostle , 1. Sharply taxeth their Schismes and divisions about their Ministers , and their diversity of gifts , as eloquence , &c. for which some factiously admired one , some another , c. 1 , 10. to c. 5. Herein note 1. An emphaticall exhortation to unity , c. 1.10 . to 14. 2. Paul's tacit clearing himselfe from being any cause of these divisions among them , either 1 By His Baptism , he baptizing very few , and none in his own name , v. 14. to 17. or 2 By his Preaching amongst them , for he preached Christ crucified , not with wisedome of words to entice them , but in demonstration of the spirit and power to save them , yet his doctrine was farre above the reach of carnall men c. 1 , 17. to the end and , c. 2. 3. He shows why he preached to them so plainly , because they were carnal , c. 3 , 1. to 5. 4. That their Teachers should be no such cause of divisions ; They are but Ministers , can do nothing without God , and therefore he warnes their Teachers to take heed that they build upon Christ the foundation ; and people not to admire mens persons , c. 3 , 5. to the end . 5. He directs them what account to have of him and his Ministry , and how little cause they have to prefer their other eloquent teachers before him , c. 4. 2. He severely reproveth divers notorious scandals amongst them . As 1. Their suffering of the incestuous person among them , who should have been delivered to Sathan by their Church-Governours , c. 5. 2. Their covetous and quarrelsome law-suits even before Infidels , c. 6 , 1. to 12. 3. Their fornications , which they counted as indifferent things , c. 6.12 . to the end . 3. He resolveth their doubts or questions propounded to him , touching 1. Marriage , and therein concerning 1. Conjugall benevolence , c. 7.1 . to . 8. 2. The unmarried and widowes , v. 8 , 9. 3. Divorce , v. 10. to 25. 4. Virgins , v ▪ 25. to the end . 2. Idolothytes , or things sacrificed to Idols , shewing that they ought not ( under pretence of Christian liberty , ) eat to the scandal of their brethren , c. 8 : as he preached without wages ( which yet were due to him ) that he might avoid the calumny of his Antagonists ; and became all things to all men to gaine them . c. 9. By other arguments he condems eating things sacrificed to Idols , as being idolatry , or communion with devils , and inconsistent with communion with Christ in his supper , c. 10. & c. 11.1 . 4. He directs and endeavours to reforme their practice in divers particulars . 1. How men and women are to behave themselves in point of their outward Habits , in publique Assemblies , c. 11 , 2. to 17. 2. How the Lords Saints ought to be managed and received c. 11. v. 17. to the end . 3. How all spirituall gifts are to be employed for promoting the Churches profit and preserving the unity of the mysticall body , c. 12. beyond all which gifts , grace , as love , &c , is much to be preferred ; yea gifts without grace are as nothing , c. 13. 4. How they should prophecy , ( the woman still keeping silence in their Churches ) c. 14. 5. He condemnes and confutes the prophane errour of them that denied the Resurrection , c. 15. 6. He instructs them about the Collections for the Saints at Jerusalem , ●c . 16 , 1.2 , 3 , 4. III , The Conclusion of the whole Epistle , with certain advertisements about more private affairs , exhortations to certain duties , and salutations , c. 16.5 . to the end

II Corinth .

THe II. Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the CORINTHIANS , So called from Paul the Penman of it . ( of whom see before in Epistle to the Romans ) and from the parties to whom he wrote , viz. The Church at Corinth , ( of which see in I. to Corinth . ) and to all the Saints in all Achaia , 2 Cor. 1.1 . probably there being many Saints in that Province , who could not so safely and conveniently meet in Church-Assemblyes , but were dispersed up and down by reason of the turbulency of those times . Calvin in loc.

When this Epistle was written , see before in the Table .

Occasion of this Epistle seems to be , those Calumnies and aspersions cast upon Pa●ls words and actions by false Apostles and other his adversaries after his former Epistle ; they charged him with l●vity , that he came not to them according to his premise : with pride and tyrannicall severity , because of the incestuous person : with less●ning the authority of the law : and that however he was glorious in his letters , yet in person he was but base , &c. Paul therefore wipes off these aspersions , & shows that he wrote not his former Epistle to them for any such ends , but for promoting of their salvation . So that this Epistle is for most part of it Apologeticall , viz. Pauls Apology against his adversaries calumnies , and this the end and Scope of it ; as also to testify his love to them , and to prevent his having sorrow from them , when he should come unto them . 2 Cor. 2.3 , 4.

Principall parts . are I. An introduction or Exordium to his Epistle , c. 1 , 1. to 8. II. The substance of his Epistle , containing a Treatise Apologeticall and Hortatory . 1. In the Apologeticall or excusatory part of he Epistle . 1. He purgeth himselfe both from the charge of l●vity and temerity that he came not to them according to his promise , 1 Cor. 16.2 . to 8. And of severity in the case of the incestuous person , showing them the true causes of his absence , wherein ( to clear himself from severity , &c , ) he inserts his exhortation to them , touching the restoring and comforting of the incestuous person , excommunicated according to his former Epistle , but now repenting c. 1 , 8. to the end , and c. 2. 2. He commends and magnifies his ministery to them , 1 Partly from the effect it had on them , Converting them , c. 3 , 1. to 6. 2 Partly from the subject matter of his ministry , viz. The Gospel farre surpassing the law in glory , c. 3 , 6. to the end . 3 Partly from his undaunted constancy in preaching the Gospel , notwithstanding all afflictions thereupon incident unto him , those afflictions working for him a far more exceeding and eternall weight of glory , c. 4. His assurance of which glory he demonstrates upon divers grounds , c. 5. 2. In the Hortatory part of the Epistle , He exhorts the Corinthians , and beseecheth them 1. To walke worthy of the Gospel , and not to receive the grace of God in vaine , and this is done more Generally , c. 6 , 1 , to 14. More specially by avoiding the fellowship of insidels and idolaters , c. 6 , 14. to the end , and c. 7 , 1. 2. To beare him like affection in receiving his doctrine and exhortations , as he beares towards them for their repentance ; and kindnesse to Titus , c. 7 , 2. to the end . 3. To a liberall contribution , to the poor Saints at Ierusalem , and in Iudea ; and this by many emphaticall Arguments , c. 8 , and c. 9. 4. To behave themselves with such du●ifull obedience to his doctrine and ministry , that he may have cause to use lenity and gentlenesse towards them , and not be put to exercise that severity against them which he intended against some , c , 10. whereupon ( that he may vindicate himselfe and his Apostleship from contempt in their eyes , who preferred the false Apostles before him ) he enters upon a necessitated and forced commendation of himselfe and his Apostleship by many considerations , c. 11. and c. 12. III. The Conclusion of the whole Epistle , 1. With Comminations of severity and sharpnesse , which he will use towards them , if they repent not , c. 13 , 1. to 11. 2. With valedictory exhortations and salutations , c. 13. v. 11 , 12 , 13 , 14.

Galatians .

THe Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the GALATIANS . So intituled from the Penman Paul , who wrote it : and from the Churches in Galatia to whom he wrote it . Gal. 1.1 , 2. Galatia , so called from Galli , i. e. The French , that came and inhabited there , who called the countrey after their name . That they were French , all agree ; but from what part of France they came , is lesse evident ; see Calvin's judgement herein , Calv. in Argum. Epist. ad Galat. Galatia was an ample Province of Asia Minor , neer to Phrygia , into which anciently entred a people from Gallia of Europe , and seated themselves betwixt Bithynia and Cappadocia , as is testified by Strabo . l. 12. Iustin. l. 25. ab initio . Livi. l. 8. decad . 4. Plin. Nat. Hist. l. 5. c. 32. The more principall cities in the Province of Galatia , ( as Appianus in Chronolog. fol. 44. notes ) were these Synopa , Pompriopolis , Claudiopolis , Ancyra , ( the Metropolis , famous for an ancient Councel there , ) Laodicea , Antioch and Nicopolis , D. Pareus in Com. in Gal. 1.2 . Paul with Silas and Timothy , travelled through the region of Galatia once , but were forbidden of the Holy Ghost to preach the word in Asia , Act. 15.40 . and 16.1 , 2.3.6 But afterwards he went over all the Countrey of Galatia and Phrygia in order , strengthening all the disciples , Act. 18.23 . In which countrey of Galatia , in most of the famous cities , Paul had planted famous Churches of Christ , as is conceived , Gal. 1.8 . &c.

Occasion . It seemes by the current of the Epistle , that after Pauls departure from Galatia , having planted the Gospel there : there came among them false Apostles and corrupt teachers , who endeavoured to disgrace Paul's Apostleship among them , and to pervert the purity and simplicity of the Gospel among them , and to pervert the purity and simplicitie of the Gospel of Christ , by mixtures of legall doctrines : urging the observance of both morall and ceremoniall law , and particularly of circumcision , as necessary to Justification ; so mingling and blending together Law and Gospell , works and faith , Iudaisme and Christianisme : tending dangerously to the subversion of that Church .

Scope . Hence the Apostle yearning over these Churches , writes this Epistle to them , to recover them out of this errour in that fundamentall point of Iustification : to convince them of Iustification by faith only ; to demonstrate unto them the nature and use of morall and ceremoniall law : and incite them to a holy Christian Conversation .

Principall parts of this Epistle , to this end , are , I. An Exordium , preface , or entrance into the Epistle , wherein he notably asserts the divine authority of his Apostleship , against false Apostles denying it , c , 1 , 1. to 6. II. A Treatise containing matters , Reprehensory , Informatory or doctrinall , and Hortatory ▪ I , Reprehensory , wherein he sharply taxeth them that they had so soon fallen from the Gospell doctrine of Justification by faith , which he had preached to them , to an opinion of Justification by the works of the law , c. 1 , 6. to c. 3 , 1. To this end that he may more fully convince them of their errour in forsaking the Gospel which he preached , he shewes , after his serious obtestation , 1. How he had his doctrine from God , who called him to preach to the Gentiles , c. 1 , 11. to 16. 2. How faithfully he had preached the Gospell committed to him , withstanding all legall mixtures in point of Justification , c. 1 , 16. to c. 3 , 1. II. Informatory or Doctrinall , wherein he asserts and proves the doctrine of Justification by faith alone , and not by legall works , by many Arguments , c. 3 , 4. As for example , because 1. They received the spirit not by preaching of the law , but by preaching of faith , c. 3 , 1. to 6. 2. Abraham the father of the faithfull was justified by faith ; consequently so must his faithfull seed be justified whether Jews or Gentiles , c. 3 , 6. to 15. 3. The heavenly inheritance is not by law , but by promise , therefore of faith , c. 3 , 15. to 19. And here by way of prolepsis to prevent objections , he shews what was the use of the law before Christ , and why the ceremoniall law is abolished at Christs comming ; c. 3 , 20. to c. 4. v. 12. And he lenisies the sharpnesse of his former rebukes , by signifying his humble , modest and tender carriage towards them , c. 4 , 12. to 21. 4. The very testimony of the law it selfe condemnes this Justification by the works of the Law , as he evidences in the Allegory of Hagar and Sarah , c. 4 , 21. to the end . III. Hortatory , here the Apostle exhorts them 1. Constantly to persist in their Christian Liberty from the ceremoniall law , c. 5 , 1. to 13. 2. Not to abuse their Christian liberty , v. 13. 3. To severall generall duties of Christianity , c. 5 , 14. to c. 6 , 11. III. A Conclusion of the whole Epistle containing , 1 A Testification of his love unto them , in writing to them with his own hand . 2 A commonefaction against false teachers . 3 An opposition of his owne example against that of the false Apostles , he preaching the Gospel sincerely , walking accordingly , and being willing to suffer for it ; and his 4 Valediction , c. 6 , 11. to the end .

Ephesians .

THe Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the EPHESIANS . So denominated from the Saints at Ephesus to whom Paul wrote , Eph. 1.1 . EPHESUS was a city on the shore of the Ionian sea , looking towards the west of Asia Minor , of old a city of great traffique , but much addicted to magick Arts , and to superstition , there being the Temple of the great goddesse Diana , Act. 19 , Paul came to Ephesus at first , and reasoned with the Jewes in their Synagogues , but tarried not there at that time , because he hasted to keep the feast at Ierusalem , Acts 18 , 19 , 20 , 21. After that he came a second time to Ephesus , and continued there preaching and disputing for two years and three moneths , and so planted a famous Church there , Act. 19.1 , 8 , 10. &c. 1 Cor. 16.9 , till by the uproare at Ephesus he was necessitated to depart , Act. 20.1 . yet after his departure into Macedonia , Act. 19.1 , 2. he committed the care and inspection of the Church at Ephesus unto Timothy , 1 Tim. 1.3 , 4. &c. And Paul being afterwards at Miletus , called thither the Elders of Ephesus , exhorting and encouraging them in their charge , knowing they should see his face no more , Acts 20.17 . to the end . After Timothy , it is supposed Iohn the Evangelist was Bishop of this Church .

When and Whence this Epistle was written , See in Table before Epistle to Romans .

Occasion of Pauls writing to the Ephesians , was not Schismes and Scandals , as in the Church of Corinth ; nor false doctrine supplanting justification by faith , that fundamentall point , as in the Church of Galatia ; But the Apostles singular tendernesse and provident care of this Church , ( he being not now farre from his death , ) lest they should faint or be discouraged by his bonds at Rome , and be weary of the Gospel through the Crosse.

Scope , To encourage the Ephesians to constancy in faith and piety , and growth therein , notwithstanding all his or their tribulations for the Gospel .

Principall Parts , To this end , are ▪ I. The Inscription or Exordi●in of the Epistle , c. 1 , 1 , 2. II. The Body of the Epistle being Doctrinall and Hortatory . 1. Doctrinall , wherein he laid down Gods benefits to them and us , or the causes of salvation . 1. Gods eternall and free Predestination of us to adoption in Christ , through faith , c. 1. 2. Redemption by the bloud of Christ , and effectuall vocation by his grace , c. 2. 3. Publication of the riches of Christ by the Gospel , especially by his ministery to the Gentiles . c. 3. 2. Hortatory , wherein by way of gratitude for former benefits , he stirs them up to divers Christian duties , which are either , 1. More generall and common to all Christians , c. 4. and c. 5 , 1. to 22. 2. More speciall and peculiar to some particular relations , as to , 1. Husbands and wives , c. 5.21 . to the end . 2. Parents and children , c. 6 , 1. to 5. 3. Masters and servants , c. 6 , 5. to 10. III. The Conclusion of the Epistle , wherein he encourages them to be strong and constant against all temptations , through the help of the compleat Armour of God , described ; showes why he sent Tychicus to them , and so concludes , c. 6 , 10. to the end .

Philippi :

THe Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the PHILIPPIANS . So intituled because written by Paul to the Saints , Bishops and Deacons at Philippi , Phil. 1.1 . PHILIPPI was the name of two cities , viz. one in Thessalie , at first called Dathos , but after Philippi from Philip of Macedo who repaired it . Alsted . Praecog . Theol. l. 2. c. 124. Another a city of Macedonia , situate in the confines of Thracia , in the fields whereof Pompey was overcome by Caesar ; and after Brutus and Cassius , by Anthony and O●●avi●s . This latter Philippi , is here meant to this Philippi , Paul came , being warned by vision to go into Macedonia , Act. 16.9 . to the end of the chapt. Here Lydia and the Iailor were converted , and Paul here laid the foundation of a slourishing Church , Calv. Argum. in Ep. ad Philip.

When and Whence this Epistle was written , see in former Table , &c.

Occasion , the Church at Philippi sent their bounty to Paul now Prisoner at Rome , to support him and supply his wants there , by Epaphroditus their Pastor , who doubtlesse coming to Paul , disclosed to him the spirituall stare of that Church , whereupon Paul writes this Epistle from Rome , by Epaphrodit us Phil. 2.25 .

Scope . To confirme the Philippians in faith and Godlinesse , to warne them against Seducers , and to testify his thankfulnesse for their bountifull remembrance of him , in his distresses .

Principall Parts , to this ●nd are I. An Exordium or Preface to his Epistle , c. 1 , 1 , 2. II. The Substance of the Epistle , wherein he 1. Confirmes them in the faith , by Promising to them Gods perfecting grace , Praising their zeal , Testifying his love to them , Removing the Scandall of the Crosse , and Intimating his great desire for the furtherance and joy of their faith , c. 1 , 3 , to 27. 2. Exhorts them to Piety , viz. to bearing the Crosse , unity , humility of minde , and purity of life , c. 1 , 27. to c. 2 , 19. 3. Commends their faithfull Ministers , Timothy and Epaphroditus , c. 2 , 19. to the end . 4. Warnes them of the false Doctrine of false Apostles , that would mingle works with faith in Justification , opposing against them his owne example , desiring the Philippians to imitate him , c. 3. 5. Encourages them in divers particular and generall duties , c. 4 , 1. to 10. 6. Gratefully commemorates their bounty to him , c. 4 , 10. to 21. III. The Conclusion of the Epistle , with salutations and a valediction , c. 4 , 21 , 22 , 23.

Colossians

THe Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the COLOSSIANS . So intituled from the Colossians to whom Paul wrote this Epistle , to the Saints and faithfull Brethren in Christ , which are at Colosse , Col. 1.2 . These Colossians were not that people dwelling in Rodes ( called Colossians from that huge Colossus or Image of the Sunne 70 Cubites high , there erected : But rather those inhabitants of Colosse a chiefe City in Phrygia in Asia Minor , neere unto Hierapolis and Laodicea ; as Hierome and Chrysostome thinke . And this Epistle it selfe seemes to intimate thus much , wherein he mentions Epaphr●s his zeale for them at Colosse , Laodicea , and Hierapolis , Col. 4.13 . Bids them salu●e the brethren in Laodicea , ver. 15. and that this Epistle be read in the Church of the Laodiceans , ver. 16. Now Laodicea and Hierapolis are neere Colosse , but farre distant from Rhodes , as learned writers import . Xenophon in 1. de expedit . Cyri ; writes , That after he entred into Phrygia , he went streight 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. Vnto Colosse a City of universall resort , rich , and great . Euseb. in Chronic. saith , That three Cities of Asia , Laodicea , Hierapolis and Colosse fell with one and the same earthquake . And Plin. in Nat. Hist. l. 5. c. 32. Seates not Colosse in any Iland , but among the Cities of the Continent .

When and whence this Epistle was written , see in the former Table .

Occasion . Epaphras fellow-labourer with the Apostles , had in Colosse with other Ministers planted a Church . The Faith preached to the Colossians was impugned , Partly by some converted out of Iudaisme who urged the Ceremonies of the Law as necessary to Salvation , confounding Christ and Moses together : Partly by some converted out of Gentilisme , who obtruded Philosophicall subtilties upon them , counting the simplicity of the Gospel too much below wise men , and so blended Theology with Philosophy , The Apostle therefore being prisoner at Rome , writes to them to instruct and stablish them in the true Doctrine of the Gospel taught them by Epaphras against all the impostures of false Teachers .

Scope . To shew , That all hope of mans Salvation is grounded in Christ alone , and that therefore we should fully rest our selves in the Faith of Christ , and live according to Gospel Rules , rejecting all Mosaicall Ceremonies , and Philosophicall speculations .

Principall parts . In this Epistle are , I. The Preface , containing , 1. The Inscription , c. 1.1 , 2 , 3. 2. The Entrance into the Epistle , wherein he commends their Faith and other graces , and wishes their growth therein , v. 3. to 12. II. The body of the Epistle consisting of matters Doctrinall and Practicall . 1. Doctrinall , where he , 1. Describes Iesus Christ and his benefits most lively ▪ that he is the true sonne of God , head and Saviour of his Church most al-sufficient , c. 1.12 , to c. 2.8 . 2. Confutes Seducers that obtruded on the Colossians either Philosophicall notions , or Mosaicall antiquated Ceremonies , c. 2.8 . to the end . 2. Practicall , where he instructs and exhorts them in Practicall duties either 1. Generall , common to all Christians , c. 3.1 , to 18. 2. Speciall , peculiar to some Relations , Husbands , Wives , Parents , Children , Masters and Servants , c. 3.18 . to c. 4.2 . where he annexes some generall exhortations ver. 2. to 7. III. Conclusion of the whole Epistle , contayning some private Affairs and Salutations , c. 4.7 . to the end .

I Thessal :

THe first Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the THESSALONIANS . So denominated , because written by Paul to the Church of the Thessalonians . 1 Thes. 1 1. And they from their City Thess. which was the Metropolis or mother City in Macedonia , Scituate on the edge of the Macedonian shore : Anciently it was called Thermae , and thence the Thermaick Haven . Suidas . Some give this reason of the change of the name ; Philip King of Macedonia in a memorable Battle in these parts overcame the People of Thessaly . For monument of which Victory , the neighbouring City was reedified and enlarged , and named Thessalonica ; as it were , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. put the victory to another . It was sold by Andronicus to the Venetians , but they did not long enjoy it ; for it was ; as other parts of Greece , quickly possessed by the Turks . Is now a famous Empory for Indian Marchandice , ( but under the Dominion and Idolatry of the Turks ) known by the name of Saloniki . Maginus in Geograph .

In Thessalonica God pleased to plant a Church by the Ministry of Paul and Silas , converting both Jewes and Greeks . See the History of it , Act. 17.1 . &c. There the unbelieving Jewes mov'd with envy , raised tumults against Paul and Silas , and also against the Saint● that entertained them , Iason &c. 5 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9. So that Paul and Silas were glad to fly away by night to Berea ver. 10.

Occasion ( as may appeare from Act. 17. And 1 Thes. 2. & 3 , 1.2 , ) was this . Paul being forced by tumults to depart from Thessalonica , and fearing least the Church there newly collected should be hazzarded through feare of troubles and persecutions ; and going to Athens , he sends Timothy back to confirme the Thessalonians in the Faith , and report their stare to him . Where●●on Timothy informing him of their constancy notwithstanding persecutions , and of all their affaires , from Athenes Paul wrote this Epistle to them for their encouragement . when this Epistle was written , see in Table above .

Scope . To encourage the Thessalonians both to constant perseverance in Faith and Grace received , notwithstanding all tribulations befalling him or them ; As also to make progresse and go on therein unto perfection .

Principall parts , To this end are , I. The Inscription of the Epistle , c. 1.1 . II. The substance or Subject matter of the Epistle is Hortatory . He Exhorteth , I. To constancy and perseverance in the Faith , c , 1.2 . to c. 4. Whereunto he urges them . 1. From the consideration of God ; rich grace bestowed on them by the Apostles Ministry , and the generall fame thereof in the Churches of Christ , c. 1.2 . to the end . 2. From the graciousnesse of the instrument whereby they were converted , viz. Paul whose Boldnesse , Sincerity , Meeknes and Amiable behaviour to them is declared c. 2.10 . to 13. 3. From their own experience of the efficacy of the Doctrine of Faith , c. 2.13 . to the end . 4. From the Apostles care and tendernesse over them , who ( though he could not come himselfe to them , yet ) sent Timothy to them to comfort and establish them , c. 3. II. To progresse in grace towards perfection therein 1. In generall , c. 4.1 , 2 , 3.2 . In particular , he exhorts them to certaine duties ( wherein perhaps they were Defective , or Endangered ) as 1 Chastity , c. 4.4 , 5. 2 Justice , ver. 6 , 7 , 8. 3 Brotherly love , ver. 9 , 10. 4 Care of quiet and peaceable living together in Christian Society , ver. 11 , 12. 5 Moderation of sorrow and lamentation for the dead in Christ ; declaring what shall become of the Dead , what of the Living at Christs second coming , v. 13. to the end . After this he meets with that curious question that might be moved , but when shall these things be ? Shewing it shall be sudden , though the particular time when , is not known ; therefore they should alwayes be prepared , c. 5.1 , to 12. 6 Due respect to the publique Ministry over them c. 5.12 , 13. 7 And he shuts up his Exhortation with an heap of Christian duties concisely couched together , ver. 14. to 23. III. The conclusion of the Epistle , with Supplications for them , Salutations , and Valediction ver. 23. to the end .

II Thessal .

THe second Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the THESSALONIANS . So stiled for the Reason above . When and Whence this Epistle was written , See in former Table .

Occasion seems to be some information , or Reports which the Apostle had received ; touching their Persecutions for the Gospel ; Touching false teachers , who insinuated to them ( perhaps taking occasion by some passages of the former Epistle about Christs second coming ) that Christs second coming wo●ld be speedily , in that age ; and touching exorbitant walking of some , in idlenesse ; Church-discipline mean while sleeping . The whole current of the Epistle intimates this occasion .

Scope . 1 To comfort the Church of Thessalonians against all Persecutions for Christ . 2 To informe them of their mistake about the second coming of Christ , that it could not be presently . And 3 to exhort them to divers Christian duties .

Principall parts , to these ends .

I. Inscription and salutation , c. 1.1 , 2. II. Body Of the Epistle , being 1. Consolatory against all sufferings and persecutions c. 1.3 . to the end . 2. Monitory , warning them against that erroneous Doctrine which any false Teachers might suggest unto them , ●s if Christs Second coming were at hand : wherein he prophetically assures them that before Christs coming , there will be an Apostacy , and a Revelation of Antichrist that man of sin , c. 2. 3. Hortatory , wherein he peremptorily prescribes Reformation of certain corruptions in manners & practice among them , interlacing divers sharp reproofs thereof . Because he deales somewhat sharply with them , 1. He premiseth an insinuative preface wherein , 1 ▪ He begs their prayers . 2 Perswades himself confidently of their obedience . 3 And Prayes for them , c. 3.1 . to 6.2 . He prescribes the Reformation of two evils , viz. 1 The remissenesse of Church-discipline towards inordinate walkers , ver. 6. to 11. 2 The neglect of manuall labour by some contrary to the Apostles Rule , ver. 11. to 16. III. The conclusion of the whole Epistle , with Supplications , Salutations and Valediction , ver. 16. to the end .

Thus farre of Pauls nine generall Epistles , written to whole Churches : Next come to be considered Pauls foure particular Epistles , directed to certaine particular persons , viz. Two to Timothy , and one to Titus about affairs Ecclesiasticall ; and one to Philemon about matters Oeconomicall . Those Epistles to Timothy and Titus , Augustine would have him that is a Teacher in the Church to have alwayes before his eyes ▪ Augustin . de Doctrin Christian. l. 4 ▪ c. 16.

I Timothy

THe first Epistle of the Apostle Paul to TIMOTHY . So denominated from Timothy to whom Paul wrote .

TIMOTHY Is a Greek name ; Signifies , An Honourer of God . Probably his Godly Parents desired he might be such an one when they gave him this name : and he proved an excellent instrument of Honour to God both in Doctrine and conversation , according to the happy Omen and presage of his name . He is supposed to be of Lycaoni● , in Asia . His Father was a Greek , his Mother a Jewesse who believed , Act. 16.1 . her name Eunice , daughter of Lois his Grandmother ; both sincere believers , 2 Tim. 1.5 . From a child they trayned him up in the Scriptures , 2 Tim. 3.14 , 15. Whence Paul is perswaded that the like Faith dwelt in him , as did in his mother and Grandmother , 2 Tim. 1.5 . His Father being a Greek , he was not Circumcised after the custome of the Jewes , but being come to maturity , Paul circumcised him , for the gaining of the Jewes by his Ministry , Act. 16.3 . And having good commendation of him by the brethren of Lystra and Iconium , Paul made him his companion in travels throughout the Churches , Act. 16.2 , 3 , 4. &c. Sometimes Paul sent him as a Messenger to the Churches ; whereupon Paul makes such an honourable mention of him and his workes , Act. 19.22 . Rom. 16.21 . 1 Cor. 4.17 . And 16.10 . Phil. 2.19 , 20 , 21 , 22. 1 Thes. 3.2 , 6. Gives him divers excellent Titles , cals him his brother , 1 Thes. 3.2 . Heb. 13.23 . His beloved son and faithfull in the Lord , 1 Cor. 4.17 . His natural son in the Faith , 1 Tim. 1.2 . His dearely beloved sonne , 2 Tim. 1.2 . The Minister of God ; and his fellow-labourer in the Gospel of Christ , 1 Thes. 3.2 . His work-fellow , Rom. 16.21 . Yea Paul joynes Timothy with himselfe in the inscriptions of divers Epistles to the Churches , that so he might both commend Timothies worth and authority to the Churches , as also propound him as an exemplary pattern to all faithfull Ministers . See 2 Cor. 1.1 . Phil. 1.1 . Col. 1.1 . 1 Thes. 1.1 . 2 Thes. 1.1 . Philem. 1. At last after many travels with Paul by Sea and Land , Paul returning into Asia committed the care of the Church of Ephesus to him , whom he knew to be so able and trusty , 1 Tim. 1.3 . &c. Which he happily taught , and governed about fifteen yeers ; but at last more grievously inveighing against the Idolatrous worships of Diana ; under Nero the Christians cruel Enemy , he was slain of the Gentiles with Arrowes and Stones , as is testified by Eusebius Hist. l. 3. c. 14. Some thinke that his bones , together with the reliques of Andrew and Luke were translated to Constantinople by Constantine the Emperour . As Hieronym . and Nicephorus .

When this Epistle was written , see in the Table above .

Occasion and Scope . The Apostle being to depart into Macedonia , left Timothy at Ephesus , that he might prevent unsound Doctrine , and ordaine Elders for that Church . Compare Act. 20. 1 Tim. 1.3 . &c. That therefore Timothy might the better know how to behave himselfe in that Church in all Ecclesiasticall affairs , he writes to him this Epistle , not knowing how long he should be absent from him . 1 Tim. 3.14 , 15. So that this Epistle may not unfitly be stiled ▪ St. Pauls Directory for right mannaging of the Office of the Ministery in the Church of God .

Principall parts , to this end ; are I. The Inscription of the Epistle , c. 1 , 1 , 2. II. The matter or Substance of the Epistle , which is chiefly by way of practicall instruction or direction . He directs Timothy , 1. Touching ●aith how to maintaine against the teachers of the Law , the truth of the Gospel wonderfully committed to Paul ) notwithstanding all impediments , and to adde to faith a good conscience , c. 1 , 3. to the end . 2. Touching Ecclesiasticall worship , for whom they should pray , c. 2.1 . to 8. How men and women should behave themselves in prayer , and in publick assemblies , c. 2 , 8. to the end . 3. Touching Church officers . 1 How Bishops and Deacons with their wives ought to be qualified , c. 3 1. to 14. To which he annects , the end or Scope of his writing this Epistle to Timothy , viz. That he might know how to governe the Church , the house of God , the pillar of truth , giving an Epitome of Gospel-truth , c. 3 , 14. to the end . which he amplifies by a Propheticall prediction of the Apostacy , from the faith which should come to passe in the latter times , c. 4.1 . to 6. 2 How Timothy should behave himselfe both in his doctrine and conversation , c. 4.6 . to the end . How in private reproofs , c. 5 , 1 , 2. How towards widows , c. 5 , 3 , to 17. How towards Elders ▪ c. 5 , 17. to the end . What duties he should teach servants , and how he should carry himselfe towards them that teach otherwise , and count Gaine godlinesse , c. 6. to 17. And how he should instruct rich men , c. 6 , 17 , 18 , 19. III. The Conclusion of the Epistle , exhorting Timothy to keep that which was committed to him , and to avoid prophane and vaine bablings , and oppositions of science , &c. c. 6 , 20.21 .

II Timoth:

THe second Epistle of Paul the Apostle to TIMOTHY . So denominated from Timothy to whom Paul wrote . A Description of this Timothy , see in former Epistle .

Occasion . The Apostle having left Timothy at Ephesus to take care of the Church there , 1 Tim. 1.3 . when he departed from the Elders of Ephesus , after he had called them to Miletus , and given them charge of the flock , they all wept sore , Acts 20.36 , 37. probably , Timothy was one of those that powred out tears , 2 Tim. 1.4 . and perhaps the Apostle , that he might comfort Timothy lamenting him , intimated some hopes of his returne unto him , 1 Tim. 3.14 . But Paul meane while being carried away captive to Rome , and by his bonds hindred from coming againe to Timothy , thought it necessary by this Epistle to stablish and comfort him , both against the Apostles sufferings and martyrdome approaching as also against all the pressures and persecutions of the Church , & that he should be moved by none of them , to desert or neglect the faithfull , keeping of that excellent treasure of truth , committed of trust to him , 2 Tim. 1.8 , 13. and 2.1 , 2 , 3.4 . and 4.1 , 2 , 5 , 6. &c. and that they might more effectually be comforted in one another , he desires him to come shortly to him , 2 Tim. 4.9 . that so they might take their last farewell one of another . For this was Pauls last Epistle ( as his Swan-like Song ) a little before his death , 2 Tim. 4.6 , 7.

Scope , To stirre up and strengthen Timothy , to constancy and fidelity , in discharge of his ministeriall office , and the keeping and asserting of the truth , deposited and committed of trust to him ; against all the present dangers and persecutions impending him or the Apostle for the same , in these perillous times .

Principall parts . to this end are I. An Inscription of the Epistle , c. 1 , 1 , 2 , together with an insinuative patheticall proem , testifying his singular affection to Timothy , v. 3 , 4 , 5. II. The substance of the Epistle , which is chiefly Hortatory and Consolatory . Herein he , 1. Exhorts and encourages him to constancy and faithfulnesse in all the work of the Ministry committed to him , notwithstanding all the Apostles afflictions endured for the truth , all the troubles Timothy might incurre in defence of the truth , and the unfaithfulnesse of some revolting from the truth , c. 1 , 6. to the end , and c. 2. 2. Prophetically forewarnes him of the perillousnesse of the last dayes , especially by reason of wicked hypocrites and Seducers , c. 3 , 1. to 14. 3. Most earnestly incites and charges him to be constant in the faith , according to the Scriptures which he knew from a child , and to be instant in preaching the word , against all discouragements , after the Apostles example , who had finished his course , and now shortly was to receive his Crown , c. 3 , 14. to c. 4 , 9. III. Conclusion of the Epistle , with 1 Some particular directions , c. 4 , 9. to 16. 2 Narration of his owne affairs , v. 16 , 17 , 18. 3 Salutations , v. 18. to 22. and 4 Valediction , v. 22.

Titus .

THe Epistle of Paul to TITUS . So intituled from the name of the person to whom he wrote , Tit. 1.1 , 4. Titus is evidently a Greek name , either derived from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Titus , i. e , A Dove ; ( as Ionah in Hebrew hath his name from a Dove , ) or rather from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Tio i. e. to honour , esteem , &c. thence 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 , Titos i. e. Honoured ; a fit name for him , that was truely honoured both by God and man . Titus was by Nation a Grecian , a Gentile , & uncircumcised probably till his death , Gal. 2.3 . yet effectually converted by Paul to the faith , hence called his naturall sonne after the common faith , Tit. 1.4 . yea he cals him his Partner and fellow-helper . 2 Cor. 8.23 . and his brother , 2 Cor. 2.13 . having enjoyed him as a companion of his travels , Gal. 2.1 . a comfort in his sorrows , 2 Cor. 7.6 . and having used him as a Legate or messenger unto divers Churches , and betrusted him with the Collections for the poor Saints in Iudea , 2 Tim. 4.10 . 2 Cor. 8.6 , 16 , 17. Paul having planted a Church in the Isle of Creta , now called Candy , he left Titus there behind him to finish the work , appointing him to set in order things that were wanting , and to ordaine Elders in every city , Tit. 1.5 . and there it is thought , he died and was buried .

Occasion and Scope , Paul having left Titus in Creet to order things wanting , &c. in the Church now planted there , and perceiving that in his absence false Teachers , erroneous in judgement , and scandalous in life , crept in , seeking to destroy the faith , by mingling Christ and Moses together , to disturbe Church-Government planted , and to disjoyne the practice from the profession of piety . Paul therefore sollicitous for the Church , writes this Epistle to Titus , both to strengthen and gaine Authority to his ministery there against all contempt ; as also to direct him , how to order and stablish things wanting in the Church , how to represse distempers and disorders arising , and how to demeane himselfe , both in doctrine and conversation , towards severall sorts of Persons .

Principall parts to this end I. An Inscription , c. 1 , 1 , to 5. II. Substance of the Epistle , ( of like nature to the I. To Timothy ) wherein he 1. Declareth for what ends he left Titus in Creet , c. 1 , 5. 2. Directeth him in reference to these ends . 1. What qualifications are requisite in Bishops , or Elders both for life and doctrine , c. 1 , 6. to the end . 2. How Titus should accordingly approve himselfe in the ministry , both in his doctrine and life , and that towards both aged men and women , as also towards servants , c. 2. and generally towards all Christians , how he should teach them to behave themselvs , both towards magistrates , and mutually towards one another , backing the same with ●ogent Arguments , c. 3 , 1. to 12. III. A Conclusion of the whole Epistle consisting of more private directions , salutations , and his Apostolicall valediction , c. 3 , 12. to the end .

Thus of Pauls Epistles written to particular persons about Ecclesiasticall affairs . Now of his Epistles written to particular persons , yea to a Church , Philem. 1.2 . about Oeconomicall or Houshold affairs . viz.

Philemon .

THe Epistle of Paul to Philemon . So called because peculiarly and in the first place directed to him , Philem. 1.2 . PHILEMON , as some thinke sounds like an Hebrew name , and signifies , The mouth of bread , so denoting his beneficence and bounty relieving them with bread , &c. that were poore and needy , See v. 7. Hieron . Others rather taking this Etymon to be uncertain , count Philemon a Greek name , signifying Kissing , from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Philema . i. e. A kisse , So intimating his kindnesse .

This is not that ancient Comick poet , called Philemon , which Paul seems to have read , by some expressions in his Epistles , as 1 Tim. 2.12 . and 5.23 . Tit. 2.3 . The fragments of which poet are extant , collected by Henr. Steph. But this Philemon is supposed to be by Countrey a Phrygian , as Theophylact. and in particular a minister of the Church at Colosse , an eminent towne in Phrygia . Paul here cals him fellow-labourer , Phil●m . v. 1. viz. in preaching the Gospel ; and a Partner , v. 17 ▪ compare Philem. v. 1 , 2. with Col. 4.17 , He is called a Bishop by Anselme , an Evangelist by Hierom. And here is mention of the Church in his house , v. 2. Probably , Philemon was converted or much edified by Pauls ministry , from that intimation , v. 19. was deare to Paul ▪ he cals him brother v. 7 , 20. his dearly beloved . v. 1. He is commended for his faith in Christ , and bountifull love to all the Saints , vers. 5.7 . Though rich , yet is suspected to be sornewhat too covetous , from that expression , v. 18 , 19. We find no mention of him in Scripture , but only in this Epistle .

Occasion . Onesimus servant to Philemon , had much wronged him in purloyning his goods , ( it is probably thought he stole some money from him ) and so ranne away from him to Rome , where ( providence so ordered things , ) hearing Paul preach he was converted , and ministred to Paul in prison . But Paul understanding the cause of his depar●ing from his Master , sends Onesimus back again to his master with this Epistle , perswading him to forgive him , and entertaine him again .

Scope . To reconcile Onesimus , now converted , to Philemon his master , whom he had much wronged formerly , being unconverted , and had runne away from him .

Principall parts , of this most elegant and patheticall Epistle , to this end , are I. The Preface or Exordium to the Epistle , containing 1. The inscription , v. 1 , 2 , 3. 2. The Apostles Gratulation at Philemons faith in Christ , and liberall love to the Saints , v. 4. to 8 , hereby he indears both himselfe and his request to Philemon . II. The Proposall of his request to Philemon , more generally , and after more particularly , viz. that he would againe receive Onesimus , whom he had sent to him , v. 8. to 13. III. Cogent Arguments , pressing this request , ( every word almost being an Argument ) some of which are couched in the Proposall of his request ; As 1. Onesimus is converted , v. 10. 2. Now he will be a profitable servant , v. 11. 3. Onesimus was dear to Paul ▪ as his own bowels , v. 12 , 4. Pauls prizing Onesimus his service , v. 13.14 . 5. Providence seemed so to over-rule his departure by converting him in the interim , as if God would prepare him for constant service , v. 15. 6. He is now not a servant , so much as a brother in Christ , v. 16. 7. Paul that makes this request , is Philemons Partner , v. 17. 8. Philemon shall not loose by receiving him , v. 18 , 19. 9. Paul shall reap the fruit of sweet refreshing in the grant of this request , v , 20. IIII. The Conclusion of the Epistle , containing 1. Pauls hope of Philemons gratifying him . 2. His request to prepare himselfe a lodging . 3. Salutations . 4. And the Apostolicall valediction , v. 21. to the end .

Hitherto of the Epistles written to the believing Gentiles , and all by Paul : Now of the Epistles written to the believing Iews by severall Apostles .

Hebrews .

THe Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the HEBREWS . So intituled in the Greek Copies , from the Penman writing it , and the parties to whom he wrote . The Syriack version hath it , The Epistle to the Hebrews .

HEBREWS . So denominated not from Heber , Selah's son , Sem's grandechild mentioned Gen. 10.24 . But rather from Abram the father of the faithfull . and that not from the name Abram , which is written with 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 whereas Hebrews , is written originally with 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 viz. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Hhhibri . but from the Epithet given first to Abram , viz. Abram the Hebrew , Gen. 14.13 . Abram being called 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. the Hebrew from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 To passe over or passe thorough , Gen. 12.6 . because from Mesopotamia he passed over Euphrates into Canaan , and so passed thorough the land . compare Gen. 12.1 . to 7. with Act. 7.2 , 3 , 4. So that Abram the Hebrew , sounds as much as Abram the Passenger , or the Passer-thorough . Hence Abrams posterity are called Hebrews , which name seems somwhat more worthy then the name Iews , because the name Iews came but from Iudah , Iacobs son the kingly stock . To Hebre●s by nation , but now become Christians by profession , this Epistle was written . Some think the Apostle wrote only to those Hebrews that dwelt in Ierusalem and Iudea , because he promises to see them , Heb. 13.23 . but Peter seems to testify this Epistle was written to the dispersed Hebrews ; compare 2 Pet. 3.15 . and 3.1 , 2. with 1 Pet. 1.1 , 2. Why might not the Epistle be written to them all ?

Penman of this Epistle is not so infallibly agreed upon by learned men . Some of old ascribed it to Luke , or Barnabas , or Clement , Euseb. Hist. l. 6. Platin . in vit. Petri , p. 10. and Hieronymus . Some to Barnabas , Tertullian . See Erasin . Annot. in Act. 1. p. 199. Some to Apollos , Luther in Gen. 48. fol. 643. De Luc. Osiander in Praefat. ad Hebr. Calvin himselfe , though in his Argument , before this Epistle , he saith , he cannot be brought to think it was Pauls , yet after seems to incline to that opinion , that Paul wrote it , Calv. Com. in Heb. 13 , 13. But that Paul was Penman of this Epistle , was the unanimous opinion of all the ancient Greek writers , ( except Caius mentioned by Nicephorus l. 4. c. 34. ) and of divers Latin Authors , ancient and moderne . See Gerh. loc. com . de Script . sacr. loc. 1. Exeges . Sect. 275. and D. Pareus Proem in ep. ad Hebr. Sect. 1. G. Whitaker disp. de sacr. script . q. 1. c. ult . That the Apostle Paul was Penman of this Epistle , may be evinced by divers considerable Arguments , As 1. All the Greek Copies of the Epistle to the Hebrews , ( except one wherein the Title was only , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. To the Hebrews ) have this Title 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The Epistle of Paul the Apostle to the Hebrews . Th. Bez. in Annot. ante ep. ad Hebr. 2. The Testimony of Peter is most considerable ; As our beloved brother Paul also , according to the wisedome given unto him , hath written unto you . As also in all his Epistles , speaking in them of these things , in which are some things hard to be understood , &c. 2 Pet. 3.15 , 16. wherein note with Gerh. Piscat . and others , 1. That Paul wrote to them also to whom Peter wrote , But Peter wrote to the Hebrews , both his Epistles , 1 Pet. 1.1 , 2. 2 Pet. 3.1 , 2. Therefore Paul wrote to the Hebrews , either this Epistle is that which Paul wrote to the Hebrews , or it s lost . That it should be lost , is unlikely , when Gods providence hath preserved such a small Epistle , and of private concernment , as his Epistle to Philemon , for the use of the Church , but doubtlesse what Paul wrote to the Hebrews , was more large and full , and touching the mystery of salvation by Christ crucifyed , as most necessary to them who stuck too much to the Leviticall Priesthood , as if it should be perpetuated , and stumbled at Christ c●ucified ; and this is the Argument of this Epistle . 2. That Paul wrote to them of the same things that Peter wrote . Herein Peters Epistle , and this to the Hebrews , agree , as That by Christ are given to us , all things pertaining to life and godlinesse , 2 Pet. 1.3 , 4. That Iesus Christ is the son of God in whom the father is well pleased with us , of whom the Prophets spoke , 2 Pet. 1.16 , 17 , 18.19 . So these things are largely handled , Heb. 1.1 . to c. 10.19 Peter exhorts them to faith and holinesse , 2 Pet. 1.5 . to 16. and 3.1 . to 15. So the Epistle to the Hebrews , c. 2 , 1. to 5. and 3.1 , 6. to the end and c. 4. and 6.11 , 12. and c. 10 , 19. to c. 13 , 20 ▪ Peter shews the danger of Apostacy , 2 Pet. 2.20 , 21 , 22. So the Epistle to the Hebrews , c. 6 , 4. to 9. and 10.26 , to 32. 3. That Paul wrote wisely , much wisedome appears both in words , matter and method of this Epistle to the Hebrews . 4. That herein are some things hard to be understood , as about Apostates , Heb. 6. and Heb. 10. as about predestination , Rom. 9. c. 11. and Eph. 1. 3. Pauls zeale and affection was great to the Hebrews , Rom. 9.1 , 2 , 3 , 4. &c. and can we thinke he should never write to them that were so exceeding deare to him , and what could he write more proper and necessary for them , then touching the abrogation of the Leviticall Priesthood , and the excellency of Christs person and office ; which this Epistle treats of , above any other ? 4. Mention is here made of Timothy his brother , and that he is set at liberty , Heb. 13.23 . elsewhere Paul cals Timothy his brother , 1 Thes. 3. 2. Philem. 1. and in what account Timothy , ( Pauls companion ) was with Paul , See Annot. in 1 Tim. before . 5. The Author of this Epistle mentions his bonds , Heb. ●0 . 34 . and 13.23 . and this is Pauls manner in his Epistles , Rom. 16.21 . 1 Cor. 16.10 , 11. 2 Cor. 1.1 . Col. 1.1 . 1 Thes. 1.1 . and 3.2 . 2 Thes. 1. 1. Philem. 1.9.10 . 6. The character of the stile and language in this Epistle , seems so plainly to be the same with Pauls in his other Epistles , that they indigitate Paul to be the Penman Well consider and parallel the ensuing places . Heb. 1 , 2 , 3. — with Col. 1.14 , 15 , 16 , 17. Heb. 5 , 12 , 13. — with 1 Cor. 3.1 , 2. Heb. 9.15 . — with Rom. 3.25 . Heb , 10.34 . — with Phil. 1.13 . and Philem. v. 1 , 9 , 10. Heb. 10.34 . — with 1 Thes. 2.14 . Heb. 10.36 . — with Gal 3.22 . Heb. 11.11 , 12. — with Rom. 4.18 , 19. Heb. 12.1 . — with 1 Cor 9.24 . Heb. 13.7 . — with Philip. 2.25.29 . Heb. 13.9 . — with Eph. 4.14 . Heb. 13.15 , 16. — with Rom. 12.1 , 2. Heb. 13.17 . — with 1 Thes. 5.12 , 13. Heb. 13.18 — with 2 Cor. 1.11 , 12. Act. 23.1.24.16 . Heb. 13.20 , 21. — with 1 Thes. 5.23 . Rom. 15.23 . and 16.20 . 2 Cor. 23.13 . Phil. 49. 7. Finally , that which the Apostle himselfe counts as it were the character and seale of all his Epistles , his Token , 2 Thes. 3.17 , 18. The Grace of our Lord Iesus Christ be with you all . Amen ; is the valedictory close of this Epistle , Heb. 13.25 .

These Arguments may strongly perswade that the Apostle Paul was Pen-man of this Epistle , and consequently , that this Epistle is of Apostolicall , yea of divine Authority , as well as his other Epistles . Nor are the objections usually brought to the contrary , of such difficulty , but that they may easily receive satisfactory Answers . And are answered by Bez. Pareus and Piscator in their Prologue before this Epistle . Gerh. exeges . loc. Com. 1. de script . sacr. cap. 10. Sect. 277. &c.

When and Whence this Epistle was written , See in former Table .

That it was not written in Hebrew by P●ul , an Hebrew to the Hebrews , and so translated into Greek , by Luke or Barnabas as some think , viz. Clem Alexan. S●rom . l. 4. Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 3. c. 3● . Hieronym . in Catal. script . illustr. &c. But rather that Paul wrote this Epistle at first in Greek , may be probably believed upon these ensuing grounds , vid. Fran. Iunium paral . l. 3. in c. 9. hujus Epist. p. 479.

1. The stile and phrase of this Epistle seems rather to Grecize , then to Hebraize , there being fewer Hebraismes in this Epistle , then in Pauls other Epistles .

2. The places alledged out of the old Testament , are not alledged according to the Hebrew originall , but the Greek version of the LXXII .

3. The Hebrew names are interpreted , as Melchi-zedek , King of righteousnesse , and Salem , peace , Heb. 7.1 , 2.

4. Most Iewes then understood the Greek tongue , especially those that lived in Asia Minor .

5. Peter and Iames wrote their Epistles to the dispersed Iewes in Greek , and Paul wrote all his other Epistles to the Gentiles in Greek ; why then should we imagine this to be written in Hebrew ?

6. The Ancient writers testifie not , that they have seen any originall Hebrew Copy of this Epistle .

Occasion , seemes to be the infirmity and affliction of the believing Hebrews . For the whole current of the Epistle , seems to intimate , That though they had entertained Christ , yet they adhered too much to Moses and the Leviticall Priesthood , and perhaps some of them had some hesitancy about Christ , whether he were the promised Messiah : and yet for their entertaining of Christ so farre as they did , they seem not only to be reproached by their Countreymen , as Apostates from the Law , but were greatly persecuted for Christ ; the Apostle understanding this their s●ate , wrote to instruct and support them herein ; vid. Athanas. in Synops.

Scope . For confirmation and comfort , of the weak and afflicted Hebrews , to evidence that Iesus Christ is true God and man , like us in all things , ( only sin excepted , ) and therefore the only true Messiah , promised in the Old Testament , and exhibited in the New ; that he is the Churches only King , Prophet and Priest , able to save all that come to him to the uttermost , having by offering up himselfe once , for ever perfected them that are sanctified , and abrogated the Leviticall Priesthood and law , and therefore that they ought to believe in him , persevere in faith , and walk worthy of Christ and his Gospel .

Principall parts . to this end . This Epistle is partly Doctrinall , partly Practicall .

I. Doctrinall and Informatory touching Christ himselfe , viz. In respect of 1. His Person ; That he is 1. The eternall sonne of God , c. 1. 2. True man , taking flesh of the seed of Abraham , c. 2. And therefore his Doctrine to be more hearkned to then the word of Moses or Angels . 2. His Office , viz. 1. Propheticall , Wherein he farre surpassed Moses , whom therefore we must believe and obey lest we lose the eternall , as Israel the temporall Canaan c. 3 , 4. 2. Sacerdotall or Priestly , wherein Christ is asserted by the Apostle , to be out great High-priest , To this end , 1. He compares him to Aaron in his call to his Office , c. 5.1 . to 6. 2. He preferres him before Aaron , c. 5 , 6. to 11 , ( and being to speake further of this mystery , by way of digression he taxes their dulnesse in understanding , and warnes them against Apostacy , c. 5.11 . to the end , & c. 6. ) Christ is preferred before Aaron , 1. In excellency of order , being of Melchisedeck's order , who was above Levi , Christ also being made of this order by an Oath , and that for ever . c. 7. 2. In Excellency of Sacrifice and Ministry beyond Aarons , he being Mediator of the New and lasting Covenant , the old being antiquated , c. 8. He entring into heaven , not an earthly Tabernacle , with his own blood , not blood of beasts ; Once , and not often ; hath purged the Conscience not onely the flesh ; and this not for a season , but for ever c. 9 , and 10 , 1. to 19. 3. Regall in divers places . II. Practicall and Hortatory to Christians , Whom he exhorts 1. To Faith and constancy therein , 1. From the perill of Apostacy ; and the great reward , c. 10.19 . to the end . 2. From the cloud of faithfull examples to be followed , c. 11. 2. To divers Religious exercises . 1. To patience and constancy under the crosse , c. 12.1 . to 14. 2. To Peace and holinesse , 14. to 18. 3. To entertainment of the Gospel , v. 18. to the end . 4. To Charity , c. 12.1 , 2 , 3. 5. To Marriage-chastity ver. 4. 6. To Contentment ver. 5.6 . 7. To follow the Faith and constancy of their teachers , ver. 7. to 16 , 8. To Benisicence , ver. 16. 9. To due respect to Church-governours ver. 17. And so concludes his Epistle ver. 18. to the end .

Thus of the Epistle of the Apostle Paul to the believing Hebrewes .

Now follow seven other Epistles , some of them evidently , the rest of them probably , written to believing Hebrews . viz. The Epistle of Iames , Jam. 1.1 . The two Epistles of Peter ; compare 1 Pet. 1.1 , 2. with 2 Pet. 1.1.2 . & 3.1 . The first Epistle of Iohn seems probably written to al the believing Hebrews , especially in Asia Minor ; for 1. the Greek title cals it a Catholique or generall Epistle Zanch. Prolegom . in 1 Ioan. Ep. p. 6 , Bez. Annot. in 1 Ioan. Because generally written to al the Jewes . ( Though some think it was written to the Parthians , among whom were many Jewes of the old Captivity and dispersion of the tenne Tribes , whence Parthians are thought to be named in the first place , Act. 2.9 . Possilius in Indic . operum Augustin . August . l. 2. Q. Evang. c. 39. ) 2. The very matter of the Epistle being directed against the blasphemous errou●s broached among the Iewes , especially those of Ebion and Cerinthus against the Divinity of Christ , seemes to imply that it was principally written to the Iewe● . The second Epistle of Iohn is to an Elect Lady , probably a believing Hebrew , of great wealth and worth . For he warns both her and her children of the Heresies and seducers that opposed the person of Christ after the manner of his first Epistle . And he intimates his intention of visiting them shortly . Gaius , ●o whom he wrote his third Epistle , is not obscurely intimated there to be a believing Jew , 3 Ioh. v. 1 , 2 , 6 , 7. As Piscat . in loc. notes . Finally the Epistle of Iude seemes written to the dispersed believing Iewes . 1 In the Greek title it being called Catholike or Generall . 2 And for the matter of it being of like nature with 2 of Pet. even as an Abstract of it ; against the Seducers of those times , as the samenesse of words and phrase import .

These seven Epistles are by some called , Catholique ; by some Canonicall .

Catholique , or Generall ; not in respect of the universall concernment of the matters contayned in them , for such is the matter of Pauls Epistles also : but in respect of the parties to whom these Epistles are written , viz. Not to any particular Church , as the Epistle to the Romanes , Corinth , &c. Nor to particular persons as the Epistle to Timothy , Titus , Philemon : But generally to the believing Iewes dispersed in severall Countries . In this respect divers Latin , especially Greek writers call them Catholique , viz. Greek Scholiast . ( as Bez. Annot. ante Epist. Iac. observes . ) Origen apud Euseb. Hist. l. 6. c. 19. Dionys. Alexandrin . apud Euseb. l. 7. c. 20. Eusebiu● Hist. l. 2. c. 22. Cyril Hierosolym . Catech. 17. Hieronym ▪ in Catal. Script . &c. Though properly the second and third Epistle of Iohn cannot be called Catholique , yet being joyned to Iohn's first Epistle , which is Catholique , by use they come to be so called , though abusively .

Canonicall ; not that these seven Epistles onely , or peculiarly , among al● others are Canonicall and A●thentique ; that were to derogate from other Epistles of Paul ; but because they contain Canons or Rules of Christian life . Ger. loc. ●om . exeg . loc. 1. c. 10. § . 291. Beza thinks they were by mistake called Canonicall ( perhaps for Catholicall ) for 1. why should not also Pauls Epistles be called Canonicall ? 2. Greek writers do not so call them . 3. Latins have , though groundlesly , doubted of the authority of the Epistle of Iames , and second of Peter . Therefore it s not probable they would call them Canonicall . Bez. Annot. ante Epist. Iacob . & D. Pareus in prolegom . in Epist. Iacobi .

James .

THe Catholique Epistle of JAMES the Apostle . So stiled in the Greek Copies . Bez.

Penman hereof was Iames. Iam. ● . 1 . Iames in Greek and Latine is the same with the Hebrew Iakob , which signifies A supplanter . Gen. 25.25.27 . 36. But what Iames this was , is not so easily determined . There were three of that name ( as some learned Authors are of opinion ) two of them Apostles , and one of the 70 Disciples , viz. 1. Iames the sonne of Zebedee , brother to Iohn , Matth. 4.21.22 . & 10.2 . He was with Christ at his transfiguration , Mat. 17.1 . He was called Iames the greater , either in respect of his age , or of his stature , or of his calling to the Apostleship . The Syriack interpreter seems to ascribe this Epistle to this Iames , as Tremellius renders it , Tres Epistolae , &c. i. e ▪ Three Epistles of three Apostles before whose eyes our Lord did trans-fi-gure himselfe , viz. Of Iames , Peter , and Iohn . But ( as Pareus notes , Proem . in Epist. Iac. ) the Kings edition translated by G. Fabritius hath it thus , In nomine Domini I●shua Meschicho sigillamus tres Epistolas : Iaakoub , & Petri , & Iouchanon . i. e. In the name of the Lord Iesus the Messiah , we Seale the three Epistles of Iames , and Peter , and Iohn . This speakes not particularly of Iames the greater . Besides , this Iames was pu● to death by Herod Agrippa , in the second yeare of Claudius . See Act. 12.1 , 2. but this Epistle seemes to be writt●n afterwards to the convert Iewes dispersed , afte● Claudius had cast both Iewes and Christians out of the City of Rome , Act. 18.1 , 2. Su●ton in Claud. c. 25.2 . Iames the sonne of Alpheus , an Apostle also , Matth. 10.3 . Act. 1.3 . Brother of I●de , Iud. 1. Called sometimes Iames the lesse , for distinction from the former Iames , Mark . 15.40 . and the brother of the Lord , Gal. 1.19 . Matth. 13.55 . Mark . 6.3 . Either 1 because he was the sonne of Ioseph ( the supposed Father of Christ ) by a former wife , as divers both Greeke and Latin Fathers think See Iacob . Laurentii Com. in la. 1.1 . p. 1● . 12 . Or rather ● he is called the Lords brother ( after the Hebrewes manner of speaking ) because he was Cousin germane to him , his Mother being that Mary wife of Cleophas , ( as some thinke ) which was Sister to the blessed Virgin , Mark . 16.1 . Hieronym . advers. He●uid . lib. Theodoret. in Epist. ad Gal. cap. 1. Ignatius thinks he was called the Lords Brother because he so exactly resembled Christ in countenance , and conversation , as if they had been twins , and that he was surnamed Iustus . Ignat . in Epist. 2 ad Ioan. Seniorem . This Iames is conceived to be Penman of this Epistle , it being most suitable to an Apostle of unlimited Commission to take care of all the Tribes dispersed . The matter of the Epistle becomes an Apostolicall Spirit . Nor ( saith Pareus ) doth any thing solidly contradict this opinion ; who there answers objections against it . Therefore if the Epistle be Apostolicall , it is questionlesse of Divine Authority . 3. As for the third Iames called Oblias , of the number of the seventy Disciples , Bishop of Ierusalem , some question whether there were such an one ; others count it most unlikly that he should be Penman of this Generall Epistle , that was confined him selfe to a Particular charge .

Occasion and Scope . Iames taking notice that the twelve Tribes dispersed were under great Temptations and tryalls of affliction ; and also that too many among them contented themselves with a fruitlesse profession of Faith without the concurrent practice of Holinesse : w●ites unto them , principally to comfort and support them under their present sharp tryals and tribulations , Iam. 1.2 . &c. 5.7 , to 12. As also to exhort them to joyne good works and an holy life to their Faith , without which their Faith was but a dead carkasse , c. 2.14 . to the end .

Principall parts . In this Epistle are , I. A superscription , c. 1.1 . II. Substance of the Epistle , which is chiefly Hortatory ( here and there some few Doctrinals being inserted . ) They are exhorted , 1. To Patience and Prayer under the outward Tentations of the crosse c. 1.2 , to 13. 2. To ascribe the inward Tentations to sin , to themselves , not to God , c. 1. ver. 13. to 19. 3. To right hearing of the word c. 1.19 . to 26. 4. To true Religion and undefiled , c. 1.26 , 27 , 5. To avoid respect of persons , c. 2.1 , to 14. 6. To joyn unto Faith the proper fruits of good-works , without which Faith is but false and dead , and not that Faith that justifieth , c. 2.14 . to the end . 7. To avoid the sinfull abuses of the tongue , c. 3. 8. To restrain their corrupt lusts and the pernicious fruits thereof , c. 4.1 , to 8. 9. To walk penitently and holily , c. 4. 8. to 13. 10. Not to undertake humane Actions with vaine confidence , but with dependence upon Gods providence , c. 4.13 . to the end . 11. Not to abuse riches , &c. c. 5 , 1. to 7. 12. That the Godly patiently beare the injuries of the rich , c. 5. vers. 7. to 12. 13. To take heed of all rash swearing , ver. 12. 14. To use Prayer , especially as an Antidote against afflictions , ver. 13. to 19. 15. To reduce an erring brother , ver. 19 , 20.

I Peter .

THe first Catholique Epistle of PETER the Apostle . So called , partly in reference to the dispersed Jewes to whom generally this Epistle is directed ( as was fore noted ) ; partly in respect of Peter the Apostle Penman of it , 1 Pet. 1.1 .

PETER [ 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ] a Greek name . Not the Proper name , but rather the Surname of this Apostle , Act. 10.5 . His proper name was Simon , an Hebrew name 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. An hearer . From 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 To Heare . Act. 10.5 . Ioh. 1.43 . Christ surnamed him Peter . This surname was 1 Promised to him by Christ when he was first called to be Christs Disciple , Ioh. 1.43 . 2. Given to him by Christ when he called him to the Apostleship , &c. Mark . 10.16 . Luk. 6.14 . 3. Confirmed to him by Christ also , upon Peters firme and excellent confession of Christ , Matt. 16.17 . Peter in Greek is the same with Kephas or Kipha in Syriack , both signifie a Stone . Christ gave him this name by Anticipation , in reference to that firm and solid Confession of Faith touching Christ , which Peter should , yea did make ; and on which Faith confessed , as on a Rock , Christ did promise to build his Church , &c. Matth. 16.16 . &c. Which was fulfilled , Peter preaching the first Sermons whereby both Iewes and Gentiles were converted to Christ , and the first foundation of the Christian Church after Christ was laid , Act. 2.14 . &c. 10 34. &c. Which was the Priviledge conferred by Christ upon Peter peculiarly above all the Apostles . Peter was the sonne of Iona , and brother of Andrew ; by trade they were Fishers , whence Christ called them to be Fishers of men , Matth. 4.18 . ●eter had his notable Eminencies ; As 1. 〈◊〉 singular courage , zeale , and boldnesse for expressing himselfe , Matth. 26.3 . Luke 22 , 23. Act. 2.14 . Hereupon counted one of the three pillers of the Primitive Church , Gal. 2.9 . 2. He made that admirable Confession of Christ , Matth. 16.16 . 3. He was one of the three which Christ took up into the Mount to see his glorious transfiguration , Matth. 17.1 . &c. Mark . 9.2 . Luk. 9.28 . 4. He was one of the three which Christ took out from his Apostles to accompany him in his bitter Agony , Matth. 26.36 , 37. &c. 5. Christ after his resurrection eminently restored him to the exercise of his Pastorall office , by his threefold profession of his sincere love to Christ , after his threefold denyall of Christ , Ioh. 21.15 , 16 , 17. He had also his remarkable Infirmities . 1. Inconsiderately cut off Malchus his Eare , Matth. 26.51 . &c. 2. Self-confidently presumed against denying Christ , Matth. 26.31 . to 36. 3. Shamefully denyed Christ thrice , and every time worse then other , Matth. 26.69 , to 75 ▪ 4. And walked not with a right foot in the beginning of his Ministry , drawing the Gentiles to Iudaize among the Iewes , &c. Gal. 2.14 . &c.

When and Whence this Epistle was written . It 's more then probable Peter wrote this Epistle by Sylvanus to the Iewes of the dispersion while he was now at Babylon , 1 Pet. 5.12 , 13. There was a Babylon in Chaldea , Psal. 137. A Babylon in Egypt . And in resemblance hereunto the mysticall Babylon , viz. Rome , Rev. 14.1 . & 16.19 . & 17.5 . & 18.2 ▪ 10 , 21. Now Papists themselves upon this place generally contend , that here by Babylon is meant Rome , that they may prove Peter was at Rome , Fenardent . in loc. But they forget how herein they confesse Rome to be that wicked Babylon destined to destruction , Rev. 17. and 18. Luther leaves every man to abound in his own sense which Babylon it was . Pareus thinks that Babylon in Chaldea is to be here understood , where Peter the Apostle of the Circumcision preached to the Iewes : and that no one reason can be given why Peter should conceale the name of Rome , had he intended Rome . D. Par. Com. in 1 Pet. 5.13 . From that phrase , if any man suffer as a Christian , 1 Pet. 4.16 . intimates that this Epistle was written after Antioch , had received the faith , for there the disciples were first called Christians , Act. 11.26 . and it was about the same time , that Iames was crowned with Martyrdome , Act. 12.1 , 2.

Occasion . The strangers that came up to Ierusalem at Pentecost , were many of them converted by Peters Sermon , and so baptized Acts 2. to whom therefore Peter here writes , as to new borne babes , 1 Pet. 2.2 . weak , and as yet unsetled in the faith , and upon their returne into their owne countreys , much exercised for Christs sake with afflictions and crosses , as the current of the Epistle manifests .

Scope . That therefore the Apostle as a spirituall father , might confirme these his children in faith , against all troubles and persecution , he writes to them all this Epistle , assuring them , that the faith or doctrine of grace wherein they stood , was the true grace of God , and cons●quently he exhorts and stirs them up to persevere therein . To grow and abound in grace and godlinesse . This the great drift of both his Epistles , See 1 Pet. 5.12 . and 2 Pet. 3.1 . &c.

Principall parts of the Epistle to this end , are , I. The Inscription , c. 1 , 1 , 2. II. The Substance of the Epistle it selfe , which is principally Hortatory , in reference to that grace of God . He incites them , 1. To the constant exercise and improvement of that grace of God , whereby they are brought into a regenerate and sanctified state ; and this concernes them all in their generall calling as Christians , c. 1 , 3. to c. 2. v. 13. 2. To the due exercise of grace , in respect of their respective conditions and relations wherein they stand towards others . And this exhortation concernes them severally , according to their respective particular callings and conditions . viz. How 1. Subjects are to behave themselves towards magistrates , c. 2 , 13. to 18. 2. Servants towards their masters , ver. 18. to end . 3. Wives towards their husbands , and husbands towards their wives , c. 3 , 1. to 8. 4. All brethren towards one another , v. 8. 5. Distressed and afflicted ones towards oppressours and Persecutors , c 3 , 9. to c. 5 , 1. 6. Presbyters towards their flocks , and the younger towards the Elder , c. 5 , 1. to middle of v. 5. 7. How all of them should carry themselves towards others , themselves , and God , v. 5. to 10. And so he sweetly closes up the whole series of his exhortations , with a patheticall prayer to the God of all grace , for their stablishment and perfection in grace after their short afflictions : concluding it with a gratefull doxology unto God , v. 10 , 11. III. Conclusion of the Epistle , containing an intimation of his Scope in writing , salutations , and a valediction , c. 5 , 12 , 13 , 14.

II Peter :

THe II. Catholique Epistle of PETER the Apostle . The Apostle himselfe cals this his Second Epistle . He writes it to the same people , to whom he wrote his first , viz. To the believing Jews dispersed , and in effect to the same end , 2 Pet. 3.1 , 2. and 1.12 , 13 , 14 , 15.

Some few writers have doubted of the Authority of this Epistle , ( as also of that of Iames , of the second and third of Iohn , and of the Epistle of Iude , ) as Eusebius intimates , Eccles. Hist. l. 3. c. 22. Hieronym . in Catal. vir . illustr. in Petro. Nor is it found in the Syriack version .

B●t divers cogent Arguments perswade us that this is an Apostolicall Epistle , and written by Peter , As 1. The inscription mentions the same Penman of this Epistle with the first , viz. Simon Peter a servant and an Apostle of Iesus Christ . 2 Pet. 1.1 . He that wrote this Epistle , testifies , that he must shortly put off this his Tabernacle , as our Lord Iesus Christ hath shewed him , 2 Pet. 1.14 . to whom did Christ shew this but to Peter ? Iohn 21.17 . 3. He that wrote this Epistle , was with Christ upon the Mount at his transfiguration , beheld his majesty , — and heard that voice of the father from heaven , when he was with Christ on the holy Mount , This is my beloved sonne in whom I am well pleased , 2 Pet. 1.16 , 17 , 18. Now there were only three , viz. Peter , Iames and Iohn in the Mount with Christ , at his transfiguration , Matth. 17.1 , 2. therefore it must be written by one of them three , ( and by whomsoever of them , it is of Apostolicall , yea of divine Authority , ) but unto Iames or Iohn none ever yet ascribed it , nor is there any reason so to do , but many to the contrary : therefore it must needs be confessed to be written by Peter . 4. He that writes this Epistle , cals it his Second Epistle , and intimates he wrote them both to the same persons , viz. the dispersed believing Jews . compare 2 Pet. 1.1 . and 3.1 . with 1 Pet. 1.1 . 5. He that wrote this Epistle cals Paul his beloved brother , commends him , and approves the Authority of his Epistles , 2 Pet. 3.15 , 16. which were too much for any , but for an Apostolicall pen. 6. An holy Apostolicall spirit breathes throughout this whole Epistle , both in his exhortations to holy duties , monitions against false-teachers and Apostacy , and predictions of things to come . 7. The stile and phrase Apostolicall and consonant enough to that of Peters first Epistle . Hist. Magd. Cent. 1. l. 2. c. 4. 8. To all these may be added the consent of ancient Writers , that count this Epistle Canonicall and Apostolicall , Concil. Laodicen . Can. 59. Carthaginens . 3. Athanas. in Synops. Damascen . l. 4. c. 18. Epiphan. Heres . 76. August . l. 2. De Doctrin . Christian. c. 8. And Beda in Comment . wonders how any should doubt of the Authority of this Epistle , when the Penman hath put his name in the beginning , and testifies he was with the Lord in the holy mount .

So that this Epistle is of unquestionable authority .

Peter made this Epistle a little before his death , 2 Pet. 1.14 .

Occasion & Scope . Peter considering , that shortly he must put off the Tabernacle of his body 2 Pet. 1.14 . that some were too negligent of making their calling and election sure ; that there then were , and afterwards would be false teachers and seducers in the Church , and scoffers against the second comming of Christ ; Therefore Peter wrote this Epistle to stirre them up , by putting them in remembrance of those things which had been preached among them , 2 Pet. 1.12 , 13 , 14. & 3.1 , 2. specially inciting them to progresse in grace , to watchfulnesse against false teachers and scoffers , and to a preparednesse for the comming of Christ , as the whole current of the Epistle evidences .

Principall parts .

I. Inscription of the Epistle , c. 1 , 1 , 2. II. Substance of the Epistle , which is 1. Hortatory , exhorting them to progresse and perseverance in grace and piety , c. 1. 2. Monitory , warning them to take heed of those hereticall and blasphemous seducers which should creep into the Church , threatning destruction to them , c. 2. 3. Propheticall , foretelling of sensuall scoffers against Christs comming in the last days : and of the day of judgement , the new heavens and new earth ; whereunto they should prepare themselves by piety , c. 3 , 1. to 17. III. Conclusion of the Epistle , with a summary recitall of his former exhortations , and with a doxology unto our Lord Jesus Christ , c. 3 , 17 , 18.

I John .

THe first Catholique Epistle of JOHN the Apostle . This Epistle hath this Title in all the ancient manuscript Copies . Bez. Annot. ante hanc Ep. Which as Beza there well advertiseth us , we are thus to understand , viz. The first Epistle of Iohn the Apostle which is Catholick ; for of all Iohn's Epistles , this only is Catholique or Generall , the other two being particular . viz. The 2d to the Elect Lady and her children ; The 3d d to Gaius , and therefore it were improper to call it the first Generall Epistle in any other sense .

Penman of this Epistle , is Iohn the Apostle , as is evident . 1. From the Greek Title , 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 i. e. The first Catholique Epistle of John the Apostle ; thus all ancient Greek Copies have it . Bez. 2. From his manner of speaking of Christ , asserting his divinity in divers passages of this Epistle , as 1 Iohn 1.1 , 2. & 2.22.23 , 24. & 5.5 , 6 , 7. &c. and calling him the Word 1 Iohn 1.1 . and 1 Iohn 5.7 . Iohn being most sublime in asserting the Godhead of Christ , Iohn 1.1 , 2 , 3. &c. and Rev. often ; and no writers in the New Testament , stiling Christ the Word but Iohn in his Gospel , Iohn 1.1 , 14. in his Revelation , Rev. 1.2 . and 19.13 . and here in this Epistle . 3. From that eminent and singular Character of Iohns spirit . viz. The spirit of love , most predominant and conspicuous all along this Epistle , as in his Gospel and Revelation . Iohn was the disciple whom Jesus loved above all his disciples . Iohn 13.23 . & 19.26 . and 20.2 . and 21.7 , 20. He was a meer compound of sweetest love ; in all his writings , breaths nothing in a manner but love ▪ Hence excellently Calvin , Haec Epistola , prorsus digna est ejus discipuli spiritu , qui prae aliis ideò a Christo dilectus fuit , ut ipsum nobis familiarem redderet . i. e. This Epistle is altogether worth the Spirit of that disciple , which was therefore beloved of Christ above the rest , that he might render him familiar unto us . Calv. Argum. in 1. Ioan. Of Iohn , see more in Annot. on Gosp. of Iohn . Iohn therefore being the undoubted Penman of this Epistle , it is of unquestionable Authority , Eusebius and Hieronymus testify , That there never was doubt in the Church about the Author or Authority of this Epistle . Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 3. c. 25. Hieronym , in Catalog . Augustin cals it satis dulcem & satis memorabilem in Ecclesia dei , quód in ipsa charitas maximé commendetur . i. e. A most sweet Epistle and most memorable in the Church of God , because love is especially commended therin . Aug. Praef. in 1. Ioan. Ep. and saith that orbem ter●arum ipsa edificavit , i. e. It hath edified the world , Aug. Tract . 7.

When and Whence this Epistle was written , Iohn wrote his Gosp. at Ephesus , Iraen . l. 3. c. 1. advers. haeres . This Epistle seemes to be written after his Gospel . He wrote it when he was now old ; thinks Hierome . And being old , he departed not from Asia , therefore is probable he wrote it at Ephesus , Zauch . Prolegom . in 1. Ioan. p. 6. Iohn lived after the other Apostles and wrote after them .

Occasions . I. Iohn observed that in his daies there were many hereticall Teachers , Seducers , which he cals Anti-christs , ( and by a propheticall spirit foresaw that afterwards there would arise many more . ) Epiphanius reckon● up these before and in Iohn's dayes , viz. 1. Simonians . 2. Menandrians . 3. Saturnilians . 4. Basilidians . 5. Nicolaitanes ▪ of whom Rev. 2. 6. Gnosticks . 7. Carpocratians , from Carpocrates in Asia ; who taught men must sinne , and do the will of all the devils ; otherwise they could not enter into heaven . 8. Cerinthians and Merinthians , from Cerinthus and Morinthus , who denyed Christs divinity , said he was not before Mary , that he was a meere man . 9. Habionits , who held the same heresie . 10. Nazaraei , that urged Moses law , See Epiphan. in Panario . l. 1. Tom. 2. II. Iohn took notice of divers carnall believers , who made great profession of knowledge , faith and piety towards God , who yet lived ungodly to the scandall of the Gospel . III. Finally , Iohn considered how necessary it was to encourage true believers in faith , and promote them to assurance of their interest in eternall life . These gave Iohn Occasion of writing this Epistle by way of remedy .

Scope . The blessed Apostle Iohn in this Epistle principally levels at these three ends .

1. To detect and confute hereticall and Anti-Christian Seducers , and warne the believers against them and their false Doctrine . These things have I written to you , concerning them that seduce you 1 John 2.26 . particularly and especially proving , That Christ is true and eternall God , against Corinthians and Hebionites , c. 1. That Christ is true man , and assumed true flesh , against Cerdonians , Manichees , Priscillianists and Valentinians , ( which by a Propheticall spirit , he foresaw would follow , ) c. 4. That Iesus is the true Christ , the promised Messiah against Iew● and Nazarites , c. 2. That the Father , Word and holy Ghost , are three true distinct Persons , of one essence ; against Sabelli●ns , &c. c. 5. That they that are born of God ought not , nay , as such , cannot commit sin ; and such as do not righteousnesse are of the devill , not of God , against the Carpocratians , c. 3. 2. To stirre up all that professe to know God and believe in him , that they walk in light , not in darknesse , 1. Iohn 1.5 , 6 , 7. as Christ walked , that they keep the Commandements , especially abound in love , 1 Iohn 2.4 , 5 , 6. and all along the Epistle . 3. To provoke true believers to growth in faith and grace ; and to help forward their assurance of their interest in eternall life .

This last end is clearly professed in 1 Iohn 5.13 . These things have I written unto you , that believe on the name of the Sonne of God , that yee may know that yee have eternall life . — And therefore it is most singularly observable of this sweet and precious Epistle , what a multitude of Marks , Signs or Discoveries of believer's spirituall State , are here plainly and purposely laid downe for this end , more then in any other so short a piece of Scripture in the whole Bible . Which Signes are here reduced to severall heads , and set downe for the help and comfort of the Readers , in some of which , at least the weakest ( if a sincere Christian ▪ ) may find abundant soule-refreshing , and heart-establishment .

I. Evidences , Signes or Discoveries of Gods love to us . 1. Christs being sent to lay down his life for us , that we might live by him , 1 Iohn 3.16 . and 4.9 , 10. 2. Adoption , That we should be called the sonnes of God , 1 Iohn 3.1 . 3. Our not loving the world , nor the things of the world inordinately , 1 John 2.15 , 16 , 17. 4. Our love to God , which is an effect , or reflexive beame of Gods love to us , 1 Iohn 4.19 . II. Evidences or Signes of our Regeneration , Sonneship , &c. 1. That the world knoweth us not , 1 Iohn 3.1 . 2. True believing that Jesus is the Christ , 1 Iohn 5.1 . 3. Not committing sin , 1 Iohn 3.9 . and 5.18 . Especially in respect of that great sin of sins , The wicked one toucheth him not , 1 John 5.18 . 4. Hope ( if not assurance ) that we shall be conforme to God in his glorious appearing , 1 Iohn 3.2 , 3. 5. In hope of glory , purifying our selves as God is pure , 1 Iohn 2.3 . 6. Overcoming erroneous hereticall spirits , 1 Iohn 4.1 , 4. 7. Overcoming the world by faith , 1 Iohn 5.4 , 5. 8. Doing of righteousnesse , 1 Iohn 2.29 . and 3.10 . 9. True love of the brethren , 1 Iohn 3.10.14 . and 4.7 . III. Evidences or Signes that we are of the truth , of the true number of Gods people . 1. Having an unction from the holy one teaching us all things , 1 Iohn 2.19 , 20 , 27. 2. The Testimony of an upright heart or conscience , 1 Iohn 3.19 , 20 , 21. 3. Perseverance with the faithfull in Christ and the truth 1 Iohn 2.19.27 . IIII. Evidences or Signes of being in light , not in darknesse ; in life , not in death . 1. Having the Sonne , 1 Iohn 5.11.12 . 2. Loving , and not hating our brother , 1 Iohn 2.9 , 10 , 11. and 3.14 , 15. V. Evidences or Signes of the true knowledge of God . 1. Keeping his Commandements , 1 Iohn 2.3 , 4. 2. Denyall of sinne , 1 Iohn . 3.6 . 3. Mutuall love of one another , 1 Iohn 4.7 , 8. VI. Evidences or Signes of our love to God and Iesus Christ . 1. The casting out of base feare , 1 Iohn 4.18 . 2. Not loving the world , and things in the world inordinately , 1 Iohn 2.15.16 . 3. Keeping of his Commandements and his Word chearfully , 1 Iohn 2.5 . and 5.3 . 4. Opening our bowels of compassion to brethren in need , 1 Iohn 3.17 . and 1 Iohn 5.1 . 1 Iohn 4.11 , 12 , 20 , 21. VII . Evidences or Signes of our Communion with God and Iesus Christ . 1. His spirit given us , 1 Iohn 3.24 . and 4.13 . 2. The Truth 's abiding in us , 1 Iohn 2.24 . 3. Confessing that Jesus is the Son of God , 1 Iohn 4.15 . 4. Not doing sinne 1 Iohn 3.6 , 8. 5. Love to God and dwelling therein , 1 Iohn 4.16 . 6. Walking in light , not in darknesse . 1 Iohn 1.5 , 6 7. 7. Walking as Christ walked , 1 Iohn 2.6 . 8. Keeping his Words and Commandements , 1 Iohn 2.3 , 4 , 5. and 3.23 , 24. 9. Brotherly love , 1 Iohn . 4.12 . VIII . Finally , Evidences or Signs of true brotherly love , or love of Gods children . 1 Joh. 5.1 ▪ 2. 1. Knowing of God , 1 Iohn 4.7 , 8. 2. Loving of God , 1 Iohn 5.1 , 2. 3. Keeping Gods Commandements , 1 Iohn 5.2 . 4. Not loving in word and in tongue , but in deed and in truth , 1 Iohn 3.18 . 5. Reall compassion to our brother in need , yea even hazzarding our life for him in some cases 1 Iohn 3.16 , 17.

By these Evidences , Signes or Characters of our spirituall Estate , clearly laid downe in this Excellent Epistle , the weak in faith may become strong in Assurance , and the strong may become stronger : yea all that truly believe in the name of the Son of God , ( if the fault be not their owne ) may hereby come to know , that they have eternall life . All which Evidences I shall indeavour very shortly ( God willing , ) more fully to open and unfold in a distinct Treatise , called , ☞ Believers Evidences for eternall life . A subject which , I hope , to gracious hearts will be most welcome and seasonable , in these sad afflicting dayes ; To help forward their Assurance for heaven , when they can have no assurance of any thing on earth ,

Principall parts . in reference to these excellent ends are .

I. The Proem to the whole Epistle , declaring , 1. What the Apostle treats of . viz. Of Christ the word of life . viz. His person , God-man : and his office . 2. What he is about to say of Christ ; not any novelty , but what was from the beginning ; not any uncertainty , but that whereof they were infallible witnesses . 3. To what purpose he will treat of these things , that they may have Communion with God , and so their joy be full , they become happy , c. 1.1.2.3 , 4. II. The Substance of the Epistle it selfe , which is either , 1. Practicall , full of heavenly exhortations . viz. 1. To holinesse of life and conversation . viz. 1. Not to walk in darknesse , but in light , c. 1. v. 5 , 6 , 7. 2. Not to deny sin to be in us , but penitently to confesse it , c. 1 , 8 , 9 , 10. 3. To avoid sinne , and yet if sinne overtake us to repaire to Christ our Propitiation c. 2 , 1 , 2. 4. To adde to our knowledge of God , true obedience to his Word , c. 2 , 3. to 9. 5. To brotherly love , c. 2 , 9. to 15. 6. To take heed of inordinate love of the world . c. 2 , 15 , 16 , 17 , 2. To beware of the dangerous Anti-Christs , and hereticall Seducers , abounding in the world , especially ●orinthians and Ebionites denying Christs Godhead , c. 2 , 18. to the end . 3. To abandon practising of sinne , as inconsistent with the state of grace , contrary to the wicked seducements of the Carpocratians forementioned , who taught men to sin , c. 3 , 1. to 11. 4. To sincere reall brotherly love , by many Arguments , c. 3 , 11. to the end . and c. 4 , 7. to the end . 5. To take heed of believing every spirit , but to try them , especially such as deny Christs Manhood , ( as after did the Cerdonians , Manich●es , Priscillianists and Valentinians , ) c. 4 , 1. to 7. 2. Dogmaticall , wherein he asserts that Iesus is the Christ the Son of God , and true man , and this from divers Arguments and Testimonies which we should believe , that we may have eternall life begun , c. 5 , 1. to 14. for perfecting whereof we should pray ; where he directs us how , and for whom to pray , c. 5.14 . to 21. III. Conclusion , with a serious monition against idolatry , c. 5 , 21.

II John .

THe second Epistle of JOHN the Apostle . This Epistle of Iohn is nor , as the first , Catholique or Generall : but Particular , being written to particular persons , viz. The Elect Lady , and her children . Who she was , is not known ; Some think that ELECT was her prop●r name : but that 's improbable , for then Iohn would not have said , To the Elect Lady ; but , To the Lady ELECT . Some turne this into an Allegory , and say that by the Elect Lady Iohn intended the whole Christian Church : But this is most unlikely , and plainly repugnant to this Epistle it selfe , for , 1. To write to the whole Christian Church under the Notion of an Elect Lady is so unusuall , that we find no such thing done in all the New-Testament . 2. This Epistle not onely mentions this Lady and her children , v. 1.4 . But also sends her salutations from the children of her Elect Sister , v. 13. 3. The Apostle speakes of his intention to come and see her , and speake face to face . Which cannot be understood of the whole Christian Church , ver. 12. She is thought to be some eminent religious Matron of great Estate , who much relieved and supported the members of the Church in her dayes . Bez. Annot. in 2 Ioan. Piscat . in 2 Ioan.

Penman . Some thinke was another Iohn then the Apostle , as is testifyed by Euseb. Eccles. Hist. l. 3. c. 39. But this seems to be a plain mistake , for 1. The Greek Copies call it in the Title , The second Epistle of Iohn the Apostle . 2. The matter of the Epistle is not only Divine and Apostolicall ; but notably owns Iohn to be the writer , wherein Christian love , walking in the truth , and taking heed of Seducers and Antichrists , are pressed as in the first Epistle of Iohn . So that this is Iohns genuine language . Compare these passages among others , viz. 1 Ioh. 2 ▪ 7. with 2 Ioh. 5. — and 1 Ioh. 2.23 . with 2 Ioh. 9. — and 1 Ioh. 4.1 , 2 , 3. with 2 Ioh. 7. — and 1 Ioh. 5.3 . with 2 Ioh. 6. &c. 3. The Salutation is plainly Apostolicall . ver. 1 , 2 , 3. And notably relisheth of Iohn's Spirit . 4. Both ancient and modern Writers , account this Epistle Canonicall , and ascribe it unto Iohn the Apostle , Concil. Carthagin . 3. Can. 4.7 . Concil. Laodic . c. ult. Hieronym , in Epist. 85. ad Euagrium . August . de Doctrin . Christian , l. 2. c. 8. Sentent . Episcoporum Concil. Carthaginens . apud Cyprian . Sent. 81. Cyprian op. edit . 1593. p. 449. Beda . Piscat . Bez. in 2 Iohan. So that this Epistle being written by Iohn the Apostle , is of unquestionable authority .

Occasion . Some thinke that Iohns familiar Christian acquaintance with this Elect Lady , gave him Occasion of writing this Epistle . Others rather think it was written against the Antichristian Heresie of Basilidis and his followers , who taught that Christ was not a true man but a phantasm , and therfore that he neither did , nor suffer'd those things which he is said to do and suffer . Epiphan. Heres . 24. Compare 2 Ioh. 7.

Scope . To incite the Elect Lady and her children , To persevere in the truth , and carefully to shun all hereticall Seducers , that bring not Christs Doctrine . A● also to adorne the truth , with love and good workes .

Principall parts . To this end , are , I. The inscription of the Epistle , containing ▪ 1. The writer . 2. Persons written to . 3. A testification of the Apostle's and other 's sincere love to the Lady and her children . 4. His pious wish o● supplication for them , ver. 1 , 2 , 3. II. The substance of the Epistle , wherein the Apostle , 1. Congratulates with the Lady , that some of her children walked in the truth , ver. 4. 2. Exhorts to constancy in the ancient Doctrine of love and truth , ver. 5 , 6. 3. Warnes them against Seducers , denying Christs incarnation , shewing the danger of them , and forbidding all fellowship with them , ver. 7. to 12. III. The conclusion of the Epistle with , 1. Intimation that he omits writing many other things , hoping to come to them and speak them by word of mouth , verse 12. 2. Salutations from her Sisters children , ver. 13.

III John .

THe third Epistle of IOHN the Apostle . This Epistle is not Generall , but Particular ; written to Gaius .

Penman of this Epistle , also was Iohn the Apostle , and therefore it is Authentique and Canonicall . Both these are ev●dent by all the foure Reasons alleadged touching Iohn's second Epistle . And the word , phrases , and method of these two Epistles harmoniously agree , as an in●entive Reader may well observe . Iohn directs this Epistle , To the well-beloved Gaius , but what Gaius this was is not so evident . Scripture mentions three persons of this name , viz. 1. Gaius of Macedonia , Act. 19.21 , 2. Gaius of Derbe , Act. 20.4 . 3. Gaius of Corinth , 1 Cor. 1.14 . Whom Paul cals , Gaius mine host , and of the whole Church , writing from Corinth to the Romanes . Rom. 16.23 . This Gaius was a man eminent for Hospitality , especially to the Ministers and members of the Church of Christ . Perhaps this Gaius of Corinth was the Gaius to whom here Iohn also writes , for 1. He is singularly commended here for his charity and hospitality , 3 Ioh. ver. 5 , 6. 2. The consent of writers subscribes hereunto . See Lorin . Comment. in 3 Iohan. Epist. ver . 1. However he was a very eminent man in the Church .

When or where this Epistle was written , is not certainly known .

Occasion . The bountifulnesse and Hospitablenesse of Gaius , which Iohn had some occasion to improve towards some Ministers that went to preach to the Gentiles , who seeme to have brought this Epistle from Iohn to Gaius , See ver. 6 , 7 , 8.

Scope , To request Gaius , according to his wonted bounty and benevolence to the Saints , to bring forward on their journey certain Ministers that went to preach the Gospel to the Gentiles . To brand Diotrephes , and commend to him Demetrius .

Principall parts .

I. The Inscription , mentioning , 1. Who wrote this Epistle . 2. To whom . 3. The wel-wishing Prayer for him , verse 1 , 2. II. The Substance of the Epistle , which is partly , 1. Gratulatory , wherein he rejoyceth at Gaius his 1. W●lking in the truth , ver. 3 , 4. 2. Charity and Hospitality to the Brethren and strangers , ver. 5 , 6. 2. Hortatory , wherein by divers Arguments insinuated , he exhorts him to bring on their journey certaine brethren that went to preach the Gospel to the Gentiles , ver. 6 , 7 , 8. Intimating that he wrote to the Church about this matter also , but feares it would be to little effect , because of Diotrephes his pride , contemning the Apostle ; neither receiving the brethren himselfe , nor suffering others to do it , whom therefore he threatens , ver. 9 , 10 , 11. But contrariwise commends Demetrius , ver . 13. III. Conclusion of the Epistle , with 1. An Apology for his writing so short an Espistle , because he trusted shortly to see him . 2. Salutations , ver. 13 , 14.

Jude .

THe Catholique ( or generall ) Epistle of the Apostle JUDAS . Thus denominated , from the Penman who wrote it , and from the persons to whom it was written , viz. the same to whom Peter wrote his second Epistle ; For substance being both the same .

Penman . Iudas the brother of Iames , Jud. 1. This is Originally an Hebrew name , viz. 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Iehudah , i. e. Praise ; from 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 Hodah , i. e. He hath confessed , he hath praised . This name was first given to the fourth sonne of Iakob , because at his birth his mother praised the Lord . Gen. 29.35 . Matth. 2.6 . There were two Apostles that had this name , viz. 1. Iudas Iscariot that had the bag , and betrayed Christ , Matth. 10.4 . And afterwards in some sort repented , Restored the thirty peeces , hanged himselfe , Matth. 27.3 , 4 , 5. So that he burst asunder in the middest , and all his bowels gushed out , and so he went to his own place , Act. 1.18 , 25. 2. Iudas the brother of Iames , Luk. 6.16 . Act. 1.13 . viz. Of Iames the sonne of Alpheus , who was famous at Ierusalem among the Apostles , Act. 15. And 21.28 . Where he is conceived to keep his chief abode , that he might teach the Iewes that resorted thither out of all Nations ; unto which Iewes especially Iudas here seemes principally to write , and therefore mentions Iames. Bez. Annot. in Iud. 1. This Iudas is also called Lebbeus , i. e. Hearty ; and surnamed Thaddaeus which is in Syriack the same with Iudas in Hebrew , Matth. 10.3 . This Iudas is supposed to preach the Gospel in Mesopotamia , Pontus , Aegypt and Persia , where the Magi slew him for his free and faithfull reproving of their superstitions .

Authority of this Epistle , ( though suspected heretofore by some , and that upon very inconsiderable grounds ; Euseb. Eccles. Hist. l. 2. c. 23. Yet ) is now generally acknowledged to be Divine ; especially considering that , 1. Iudas the brother of Iames , one of the Apostles wrote it , Iude 1. 2 Pet. 1.21 . 2. The matter of it , yea and most of the very phrases and words , are the same with those of the second Epistle of Peter , if diligently compared . See the Parallel by P. Pareus Com. in Iude. 3. Antiquity have received this Epistle as Authentique , and part of the Divine Canon . Euseb. Eccles. Hist. l. 2. c. 23. and lib. 3. c. 22. Hieronym . in Catal. vir Illustr. Concil. Laodicens . Concil. Carthaginens . Athanasus , Augustine and others who recite the Catalogue of the Books of Scripture , reckon Iudes Epistle among the rest .

Arguments or Objections to the contrary are invalid . These the principall .

Object . 1. This Epistle recites Histories no where else to be found in Scripture , as the contending of Michael the Archangel , with the Devil about the body of Moses , Iude 9.

Answ. 1. Divers stories are pointed at in New Testament . Which we find not in the Old Testament . As that Iannes and Iambres withstood Moses , 2. Tim. 3.8 . That at Mount Sinai , Moses said , I exceedingly feare and quake , Heb. 12.21 . Shall therefore these Epistles Authority be suspected ? 2. These stories ( though formerly unwritten , but happily derived by tradition from hand to hand , yet ) now are written by guidance of the Spirit of God . And the writing of them rather assures us of the truth of these Histories , then detracts from the Authority of the Books wherein they are recorded . 3. This story hath some footsteps in Deut. 34.9 . Whereupon some say , The Angel would have buried Moses , but the Devil challenged Moses to be his own , because of his killing the Aegyptian , and therefore withstood him . But others better ; God knowing Israels pronenesse to Idolatry , least they should commit Idolatry with Moses dead body ( as after they did with the brazen Serpent ) buried him no man knowing where , and the Devil , endeavouring to discover it , the Angell withstood him .

Obj. 2. Iude mentions the Prophesie of Enoch , ver. 14 , 15. The Old Testament hath no such Prophecie .

Ans. 1. Some thinke in Iudes time there was a Canonicall Book of Enoch extant , as Tertull. lib. de Habit muliebr . Beda com . in Ep. Iud. 2. Others say better then they , suppose Enoch's Book were Apocryphall , yet in Apocryphall Books ther 's some truth , and why may not this Apostle alleadge this passage out of Enochs Prophecie , without approving that whole Book , or disvesting this Epistle of its Authority ; as well as the Author to the Hebrew , alleadge some passages out of the Book of Maccabees , Heb. 11. Or Paul some Sentences out of Heathen Authors and Poets , 1 Cor. 15.32 . Tit. 1.12 . Act. 17.28 . 1 Tim. 2.12 . & 5.23 . Tit. 1.3 . 3. Others think this Prophecy of Enoch was rather reall then verball , viz. Respecting the Order of the Patriarchs , that as Death by reason of sinne had Reigned over the six first Fathers , Adam Seth , Enos , Cainan , Mahalelel , Iared , but could not touch the seventh , Enoch : so death shall Reigne ove● the world 6000 yeeres , ( which shall so long continue ) but in the 7000. yeeres , eternall life shall begin ; and death shall be swallowed up in Victory . 4. But others best of all understand here , as the Text seems evidently to carry it , Enochs verbal Prophecie , which though not written , yet Iude received by Tradition , or rather by Revelation of the same spirit of God by which Enoch prophecyed , and here recorded as part of the Divine Canon .

Obj. 3. Jude alleadges other Apostles sayings , ver. 17. Therefore seemes rather to be a Disciple of the Apostles , then an Apostle himselfe , especially seeing he cals not himselfe an Apostle , but the servant of Jesus Christ , ver. 1. And therefore this Epistle not authenticall .

Ans. 1. Though it could be proved Iude was no Apostle , yet it therefore followes not , his Epistle is not Authenticall . Mark and Luke , not Apostles , yet the three Books they wrote are of unquestionable authority . The authority of Books of Scriptur are not from the Penmen writing them , but from the Spirit of God inditing them . 2. Daniel cites Ieremiah , Dan. 9.2 . Ezekiel cites Daniel , Ezek. 14.19 . Were they therefore not Prophets , but Prophets Disciples ? Peter alleadgeth Pauls Epistles , 2 Pet. 3.15 , 16. Was Peter therefore no Apostle but onely a Disciple ? 3. Iudes alleadging the other Apostles deroga●es not from the authority of his Epistle , but proves that Iude wrote after both Paul and Peter , in whose Epistle these predictions are extant , 1 Tim. 4.1 . &c. 2 Tim. 3.1 . 2 Pet. 2.1 . &c. 4. Finally , though Iudas here call not himselfe an Apostle , that argues not therefore he was not an Apostle . Iames in his Epistle , Iohn in his three Epistles , Paul in his Epistle to the Philippians , and in both his Epistles to the Thessalonians superscribe not themselves Apostles ▪ were they therefore no Apostles ? But Iudas here stiles himselfe the brother of Iames , and that 's full as much as if he had stiled himselfe an Apostle , for the texts are expresse that Iudas the Brother of Iames was one of the twelve Apostles . See Luk. 6.16 . Act. 1.13 .

Obj. 4. But Iude the Apostle taught in Persia , and therefore had he written this Epistle , he would rather have written it in the Persian , then Grecian tongue .

Ans. 1. It s not infallibly certain that Iude was in Persia when he wrote this Epistle . 2. No necessity of the Apostles writing in the language of the people with whom they then lived . Matthew lived among the Ethiopians , Paul at Rome when he wrote some of his Epistles , yet they wrote not in Ethiopick or Latin , but in Greek . Greek being then the most common language in the world , the Holy Ghost would have Greek to be the Originall language for New Testament , as the Hebrew especially for the Old . And Iudes Epistle is Catholique or Generall , and therefore was written in Greek the generall tongue .

When and Where this Epistle was written is uncertaine . Some think this Apostle was in Persia , or Asia Minor when he wrote it , viz. A yeere before he dyed , and that he there dyed , anno 68. after Christ . Niceph. l. 4. c. 40.44 . Probably he wrote after both Paul and Peter , to whose writings he seems to have reference , v. 17. the whole Epistle is as an Abstract of Peters second Epistle .

Occasion , seems from the current of the Epistle , to be those abominable heresies of the Simonians , Nicolaitanes , Gnosticks , &c. abounding in those times times who held Sin to be indifferent , women & al things to be common , &c. Oecumen . Epiphan. in Haeres . Gnostic . Sec. Iud. 3.4 .

Scope . To warne all the faithfull in those times of the cursed and detestable Hereticks and Seducers that were cunningly crept in among them , that they contend earnestly for the truth against all their damnable errours and Heresies ; and for purity and holinesse of life , against all their impure lustfull licentious and ungodly p●actices . Iude 3 , 4 , 8 , 10 , 20 , 21.

Principall parts . To this end are , I. Inscription of the whole Epistle , expressing , 1. Penman who wrote this Epistle . 2. Parties to whom it was written . 3. The Salutation of them , ver. 1 , 2. II. The substance of the Epistle , wherein are laid down , 1. The maine Proposition or Exhortation , To contend earnestly for the Faith once delivered to the Saints ver. 3. There being so many lascivious hereticall men crept in among them , ver. 4. 2. Arguments enforcing this exhortation upon them , against these lascivious Heritiques , demonstrating the damnablenesse and destructivenesse of their wayes ,

1. By examples of Gods vengeance for like impieties and impurities in former times , viz. Upon Israel for unbeliefe , ver. 5. Upon Angels for Apostacy , ver. Upon Sodom and Gomorrha &c. For their lusts , ver. 7.

These examples he applyes to these Seducers , 1. Describing them by their , 1. Uncleannesse , ver. 8. 2. Despising and reproaching Magistrates , ver. 8 , 9. 3. Impudency in reviling what they know not , ver. 10. 4. Bruitish intemperance in carnall pleasures , ver. 10. 5. Cruelty to their brethren . 6. Covetousnesse . 7. Seditiousnesse , ver. 11. 8. Epicurisme in meats and drinks , ver. 12. 9. Hypocrisie . 10. Instability . 11. Deadnesse and Barrennesse to all good fruit , ver. 12. 12. Wrathfulnesse . 13. Shamefull uncleannesse . 14. Levity and inconstancy , ver. 13. 2. Threatning them , in generall with woe , ver. 11 , in particular with eternall destruction , ver. 13.

2. By Testimonies , 1. Of Enoch . ver . 14.15 . To which he adds further descriptions of their viciousnesse , ver. 16. 2. Of the Apostles themselves . v. 17 , 18. where he further describes these Heretiques by their Separation from Church assemblies , by their want of Gods Spirit . v. 9. 3. Hortatory Directions by way of Remedy , for 1. Mutuall edification . 2. Prayer , v. 20. 3. Love of God , ver. 21. 4. Different course to be taken by them in recovering severall persons from seducements , v. 22 , 23. 5. Zeale against all impurity , v. 23 III. Conclusion of the whole Epistle with adoxology to God , who is able to keep them without spot and blamelesse , &c. v. 24 , 25.

III. THE PROPHETICAL BOOK , Viz. THE Revelat.

THE PROPHETICAL BOOK of the New Testament , prophetically foretelling what shall be the future condition of the Church of Christ in all ages , to the end of the world , is the REVELATION OF JOHN THE DIVINE . This may well be called a Propheticall Book ; For 1 The Holy Ghost himselfe divers times stiles it A Prophecy , Rev. 1.3 . and 7.10 , 18.19 . 2 And the nature of the Book is chiefly Propheticall , as the Series of the Book implyes ; and also some passages plainly testify , that it treats of things , which must shortly come to passe , Rev. 1.1 . and things which shall be hereafter , Rev. 1.19 .

Title , This book in Greek is called [ 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ] i. e. The Apocalypse ( or Revelation , ) of John the Divine ▪ whereby are indigitated to us , both the nature of the Book , and the Penman of it .

Nature of the Book , A Revelation . so called , because it Reveals and makes known unto us secret hidden mysteries , and future events . It s true , this Revelation , is not without mixture of much intricatenesse and obscurity , ( as all prophecies are enigmaticall and ambiguous to men , till they be effected , but when the time prophecied is come , then they have a more clear , and certaine exposition . So Iraen . Advers. Haeres . l. 4. c. 43. ) And this to exercise the Reader to search out the truth , as August . de Civitat . dei , l. 20. c. 17. hath well observed .

Penman or instrumentall Author of it , viz. Iohn the Theologue or Divine . What Iohn this was , some question . Eusebius mentions two Iohns , whose monuments were to be seen at Ephesus , viz. Iohn the Evangelist , who wrote the Gospel , and 1 Epistle of John : and Iohn the Presbyter , who wrote 2. and 3. Epistle of Iohn , and the Revelation , Euseb. Eccles. Hist. l. 3. c. 39. To him also seems to incline , Dionys. Alexandrinus in lib. de Repromissionibus , But that this is a great mistake , and that IOHN the Evangelist and Apostle was Penman of this Revelation , may be cleared by these considerations .

1. This Title attributes it to Iohn the Divine . This Epithet we read no where to be given to Iohn the Presbyter , but belongs to Iohn the Apostle and Evangelist , [ 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ] by way of peculiar emphasis , because like an Eagle he soares aloft , writes more sublimely of the Divinity of Iesus Christ , both in this Book , ( in which D. Par●us hath observed XLVIII . Arguments of Christs Divinity ) as also in his Gospel , Iohn 1.1 . &c. and in his 1. Epistle . And the King of Spaines Bible , of Montanus Edition , hath this Greek Title before the Revelation , [ 〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 ] i. e. The Revelation of the Holy Apostle , and Evangelist Iohn the Divine , which Title clears this matter , and is consonant to Rev. 1.1 , 2. ( whether it were prefixed by Iohn , or after by the Church , ) nor is it any way probable that Christ sent his Angel to any other Iohn , then to the Apostle with this Revelation .

2. Iohn the Penman of this Book is so descr●bed , that Iohn the Apostle and Evangelist seemes plainly to be indigitated , Revel. 1.1 , 2. His servant Iohn : Who bare record of the word of God , and of the Testimony of Iesus Christ . Now how notably did Iohn beare record of the word of God , and testimony of Iesus Christ ? see Iohn . 1.1.2.14 . and 1 Iohn 1 , 1. and 5.9 . compared with Revel. 19.13 .

3. The style much resembles that of Iohns Gospel and Epistles . As for instance ; It is peculiar to Iohn to stile Christ , The word . compare Iohn 1.1.14 . 1 Iohn 1.1 . and 5.7 . with Revel. 1.2 . In his Gospell he stiles Christ the Lamb of God Iohn , 1.29.36 . so in the Revelation Christ is called the Lamb at least 28. times .

4 That Iohn who wrote this Revelation , had it in the I le Patmos made known to him , who was there for the name of God and Testimony of Iesus Christ Rev. 1.9 . And Histories mention no other Iohn , but only Iohn the Apostle to be in Patmos . Banished thither by Domitian the Emperour for the Gospel's sake , neer to period of his Reigne , ( as Funccius computes ) about the ninety seventh year after Christ . See Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 3. c. 16. and 18.

5. To these might be added the Harmonious consent of ancient Fathers , who unanimously conclude , that Iohn the Apostle penned this Book . Dionys. Areopag . who was Pauls disciple , Act. 17. who wrote about the sixtieth year after Christ , in those writings ascribed to him , calleth the Apocalypse , A secret and mysticall vision of the beloved Disciple , Dionys. Eccles. Hierarch . c. 3. Iustin Martyr , who wrote in the one hundred and fiftieth year after Christ , ascribes the Apocalypse to Iohn , one of the Apostles of Christ . Iustin. in Dial. ad Tryphon . To which passage Eusebius relating , saith , Iustin mentions the Apocalypse of Iohn , plainly saying it is the Apostles , Euseb. Hist. Eccles. l. 4. c. 18. Irenaeus , who wrote in the eightieth year after Christ , saith , And what things soever Iohn the disciple of the Lord saw in the Apocylapse — Iraen . Advers. Haeres ▪ l. 4 c. 50. and l. 4. c. 37. p. 373. A. Coloniae 1596. To these might be added the suffrage of many more , as of Greek Fathers , Clem. Alexand. Paedag. l. 2. c. 12. Athanas. in Synops. Epiphan. Haeres . 51.54 , 76. Chrysost. Hom. 5. in Psal. 91. of Latin fathers , as Tertull. contra Marcion l. 4. Cyprian . de e●hort . Martyr . c. 8.10.11.12 . Ambros. in Psal 50 & l. 3. de spir. sanct. c. 21. August . de Civi● . dei l. 20. c. 7. & de Haeres . c. 30. & de Doct. Christ . l. 2. c. 18. videantur Annot. in Irenae . l. 5. c. 30. p. 490. Colon. 1596. but in so plaine a case these may suffice .

So that by all this , it s plainly evident that the Penman of the Revelation was Iohn the Apostle , that wrote the Gospel , and the Epistles . The unfolding of his name , and who he was more particularly , See in Annot. to Iohn's Gospel .

Authority of this Book , is not Humane , but Divine . For ,

1. This book was indited by Iesus Christ himselfe the faithfull and true witnesse , who sent his Angel to testifie the same to Iohn the Apostle , and by him to the Churches . The Revelation of Iesus Christ which God gave unto him , to shew unto his servants things which must shortly come to passe ; and he sent and signified it by his Angel unto his servant Iohn — Rev. 1.1 . and towards the close of the book he saith , I Iesus have sent mine Angel to testify unto you these things in the Churches , Rev. 22.16 . Note , this Revelation was given by Iohn the Apostle to the Churches , by an Angel to Iohn , by Iesus Christ to that Angel , by God to Iesus Christ : How punctually then is the Divine Authority of it asserted ?

2. It was penned by Iohn the Apostle of Christ ( who was divinly inspired & acted by the Holy Ghost ) as hath bin formerly manifested , and therefore it is of divine Authority , especially considering that this blessed Apostle was commanded by Iesus Christ to write this Book , Saying I am Alpha and Omega , the first and the last : and wh●● thou seest write in a Book , — write the things which thou hast s●en , and the things which are , and the thing● which shall b● hereafter , Rev. 1.11 19. See also Rev. 2.1.8.12.18 . and 3.1 , 7 , 14. and 14.13 . and 19.9 . and 21.5 .

3. The nature of the book imports the divine Authority of it . For 1. It is eminently Propheticall , speaking of things that shall be hereafter , Rev. 1.1 , 19. and 22.7 , 10 , 18 , 19. and the prophecies of this book , are touching future events in reference to the Church to the end of the world , till the Church , the Lambs wife , shall be fully ready for compleat marriage with the Lamb , Rev. 19.7 , 8 , 9. So that neither ancient writers nor any other , but such as were inspired with a spirit of prophecy from the al-knowing God , could foretell these things to come , Isa● . 41.22 . 2. In the propheticall expressions of it , it is consonant to other propheticall books , and gives light to them , Daniel , Zechariah , especially Ezekiel , As in the particulars of eating up the Book , Rev. 10.9 , 10. with Ezek. 2.8 . and 3.3 . of sealing Gods promise , Rev. 7.2 , 3. with Ezek. 9. of the foure living Creatures , Rev. 4.6 , 7. with Ezek. 1.5.6 . of Gog and Magog , Rev. 20.8 . with Ezek. 38.2 . and 39.1 . of the measuring of the Temple and City , Rev. 21.15 . with Ezek. 40.3 . &c. Of the two olive trees , &c. Rev. 11.4 . with Zech. 4.3 , 11 , 14. &c. 3. Many things foretold in this Book prophetically , are fulfilled and come to passe actually , As Interpreters have observed in many particulars . Therefore this Book is of divine Authority , Ierem. 28.9.4 . Promise of explaining how long the Idolatrous and Tyrannicall Kingdome of Anti-Christ should last , was made to Daniel the Prophet , Dan. 12.4 , 9. which some conceive to be fulfilled in these Apocalypticall visions , Rev. c. 11. and 12. and 13. and 17. &c. And had not Christ under the New Testament left his Church some propheticall Record , for her comfort against the horrid cruelty , idolatry and darknesse of the Anti-christian Dominion , showing when it should have an end , and how happy at last the Church should be , all her enemies being universally made the footstool of the Lambe ; she were in a worse condition then under the Old Testament ; which were absurd .

4. As the Holy Ghost by Moses , the first Penman of the Canon of the Old Testament warned the Jewes against adding to or diminishing from the word of God , yee shall not adde unto the word which I command you , neither shall you diminish from it , Deut. 9.2 . and 12.32 . So by the Apostle Iohn the last Penman of the Canon of the New Testament , Iesus Christ warneth all persons that heare the words of this Prophecy ; If any man shall adde unto these things , God shall adde unto him the plagues that are written in this Book : And if any man shall take away from the words of the Book of this Prophecy , God shall take away his part out of the Book of Life , and out of the Holy City , and from the things which are written in this Book , Rev. 22.18 , 19. By which severe Commination , the integrity and divine Authority of this Book is asserted by Christ , against all whom Christ foresaw , would either indeavour to infringe the Authority of it , or corrupt the purity of it . Hereby then the whole divine Canon is sealed up , as fully now compleat , and divinely Authenticall , after which we are to expect no more Scripture from God .

5. The generall current of best Antiquity , except some few particular persons , and divers of them guilty of such heresies as this Book condemnes , hath embraced this Book , and accounted it of divine Authority . As those formerly cited , to prove Iohn the Apostle to be Penman of it , and many more that might be enumerated . As that ancient Ancyran Councel , held before the Nicene . in Append. as also the third Councell of Carthage , Can. 47. Cyprian frequently alledges the Revelation among the other Canonicall bookes , as De exhort . martyrum , c. 8. c. 11. c. 12. Testimon . Advers. Iudaeos l. 2. c. 1. Sect. 3.6 , 11. &c.

6. The Cavils and Objections , against the divine Authority of this Book , reckoned up by Erasmus or others , how weak and unsatisfactory they are , may appeare in severall writers , who have confuted them . Especially vid. Bez. Prolegom . in Apocylaps . Ioannis . and Gerh. loc. Com. De scrip . sac . in exeges . cap. 10. Sect. 294. ad sin . cap.

Excellency of this Book is most considerable For ,

1. The conveyance of it at first to the Church is singular . From God to Iesus Christ ; From Iesus Christ to an Angel ; From the Angel to Iohn , whom Jesus peculiarly loved above all his Apostles and Disciples , Rev. 1.1 . And this to Iohn when in exile for Christ in the Isle Patmos ; and that not on a common day ▪ but on the Lords day , the Queen of dayes ; and ●o Iohn in Patmos , on the Lords day , not in an ordinary but extraordinary composure and elevation of his soule , when he was in the spirit , caught up ( as it were ) and transported in an holy extasie and spirituall Rapture , that he might the more attend to these mysteries revealed , and have more immediate un-interrupted Communion with Jesus Christ the Revealer , Rev. 1 , 9 , 10. &c. what can all this import , but some singularly eminent treasure for the Church in this book , whereby the Church in her deepest tribulation , may be ( with Iohn ) spiritually intransed and ravished with many surpassing grounds of joy , and consolation ?

2. The stile is stately and sublime , and may wonderfully take the highest notion ; The expressions quick , piercing and patheticall , and may pleasingly penetrate the dullest affection . The whole contexture is so full of divine majesty , that it commands an awfull Reverence in all gracious hearts that read it .

3. The matter of it is most heavenly and spirituall , and that in exceeding great variety , notably describing the Divinity of Christ , His offices and the benefits of them , clearly pointing out Anti-Christs Seate , Tyranny , Rise , Growth , Power , Acts and Fall , and most lively delineating the Churches condition , what it was in the Primitive times after Christ , and what it should be afterwards till the worlds end ; how sad , yet s●fe under Anti-christs dominion ; how sweet and happy after Anti-Christs destruction ; how comfortable at the day of judgement ; and how glorious in heaven with Iesus Christ for evermore . What Saint would not thirst much to read and here , more to understand , but most of all to enjoy these things ? Some of them are laid downe most mystically in abstruse visions , to exercise the judgements of the wisest ; some more familiarly to succour the infirmity even of the weakest . In some places the Lamb may wade , in others the Elephant may swim . Those prevent contempt , these anticipate discouragement . Ioao●imus Abbas prefers this Prophecy , before the Prophecy of all other Prophets . Beza saith , That those things in other Prophets , which were not fulfilled after Christs coming , the holy spirit hath heaped them all together in this precious book , and also added others so farre as was needfull or usefull for the Church to know them , Bez. Prolegom . in Apoc. Oecolampadius cals this book , The best Paraphrast of all the Prophets . Ioh. Oecolamp . Praefat. in Dani●l . Hierome saith , Apocalypsis tot habet sacramenta quot verba . Parum dixi , pro merito voluminis , laus omnis inferior est ; in verbis singulis multiplices latent intelligentiae , i. e. The Revelation hath as many mysteries as words . It s but a little I say , all praise is too low for the merit of this volume ; manifold understandings lie hid in every word . Hieron . in Epist. ad Paulin.

4. The Book it selfe is compleat , capable of no Addition or Detraction , but upon severest Penalties , Rev. 22.18.19 .

5. The Penman Eminent , viz. John that beloved disciple , that sweet compound of love . It was Moses his honour who was Gods peculiar favourite , to be Penman of the first Book of the Old Testament . And it was Iohn's honour who was Christs peculiar favourite , to be Penman of the last Book of the New Testament ; oh what divine love and favour is made known unto the Church , in all the volumes between the Armes of these two favourites !

6. Finally , God counts them blessed soules , that read , heare and keepe the words of this Prophecy . Blessed is he that readeth , and they that heare the words of this Prophecy , and keep these things that are written therein , Rev. 1.3 . A blessed Book , that renders them blessed , who are practically versed in it .

The time when this Revelation was written , was when Iohn was banished into the I le that is called Patmos , for the word of God , and for the Testimony of Iesus Christ , Rev. 1.9.10 . Iohn was banished into Patmos , by that cruell persecutor Domitian , in the fourteenth yeare of his Reigne , saith Hieron . Catal. illustr. vir . in vit. Ioan. Domitian reigned in all but fifteen years , as Helvic . observes , and his fourteenth yeare was in the ninety fourth yeare after Christ , Helvic . in Chronol ▪ in the ninety sixth after Christ , saith Pareus Prolegom . in Apocal. c. 5. This Book is conceived to be written after all the Books of the New Testament .

Occasion of this Revelation seemes to be this . Iohn being banished into the I le Patmos , Rev. 1.9 , 10. doubtless gave himselfe to prayer , and sacred meditations about the affairs of Christ and his Church , whereupon Iesus Christ appeared to his beloved disciple , in a spirituall ravishment , showing him what was his pleasure , both touching the present Churches of Asia , and touching his whole Church to the end of the world ; thus comforting him : and commanding Iohn to write his visions , for the comforting of them .

Scope of this book is ,

Generally , To make knowne by Iohn unto the Churches both the things that then were , and that should be thereafter , Rev. 1.19 .

Particularly . 1 To informe the Church of the many sharp conflicts she should have with Satan and his instruments , especially Hereticks , persecuting Tyrants , and Anti-Christ himselfe , that so she might not dream only of Halcyon dayes , but might prepare more and more for the worst of stormes ▪ 2 To discover and point out in lively Colours that grand Anti-christ , that the Church might run and read , and most infallibly know who he is . 3 As also to support and comfort the Church and all the faithfull , over all their tribulations , with the hopes of the utter overthrow of Anti-christ and all their enemies ; of their owne joyfull triumphs over them ; and of the happy condition which the Church shall afterwards enjoy , partly in this world , but chiefly in the world to come .

Though this book be most obscure and intricate , yet these things may somewhat facilitate the understanding of i● , If we shall ,

1. Keep the maine scope of the Book , still in our eye .

2. Compare the passages and phrases of the Revelation , with those of other Prophecies , as Rev. 11.4 . with Zech. 4.3 , 11 , 14. Rev. 10.9 , 10. with Ezek. 2.8 . and 3.3 . — Rev. 4.6 , 7 , 8. with Ezek. 1.5 , 6 , 7 , 8. Rev. 20.8 . with Ezek. 18.2 . and 39.1 . — Rev. 21.15 . with Ezek. 40.3 . &c.

3. Parallel with this Prophecy , the subsequent Histories after Iohn's time , the Histories of the Roman Empire and Church , which testify clearly what cruelty and persecutions the Romane Emperours successively raised up against Christians : with what subtilty and fraud the B. of Rome did by degrees , ( through the folly , cowardise , negligence , &c. of the Emperours , ) step up into their throne , and subjugate not onely Rome , the Seate of the Empire , but also the whole Empire it selfe to his dominion and pleasure , whence we may derive not a little light , to see what is meant by the opening of the Seals . The Stars falling from heaven to earth . The beast speaking great and blasphemous things . The beast and false Prophet . The image of the beast . And the whore riding upon the beast with seven heads and ten hornes , and ruling in the city on the seven hils , &c.

4. Consider prudently the experience of later and present times ; how accurately doth the description of the Beast and scarlet whore agree , to the Papacy ? of the Locusts , to the Romane Clergy , and of the Frogs comming out of the mouth of the Dragon , the beast and the false Prophet , to the Iesuites and Romane Emissaries , compassing sea and land , and creeping into Kings palaces , to gather them together , to the warre of the great day of God almighty .

5. Finally , if we shall diligently read , meditate and pray , that the holy spirit , who revealed these things to Iohn , would reveale their sense and meaning to us , These things may help us to untie many knots , and render many difficulties easie .

Principall parts . In the Book of Revelation are chiefly considerable , 1 The Preface , 2 The Substance of the Book , and 3 The Conclusion .

The Preface , which is ● . Generall , in reference to the whole Prophecy , noting the Matter , Author , Penman , and Profit of this Book , c. 1. ver. 1 , 2 , 3. 2. Speciall or particular , in reference to the seven Churches of Asia Minor , and in them to the whole Catholick Church , figured by them , wherein are , 1. A Nomination of persons writing and written to . 2. The Salutation . 3. And a glorious Description of Jesus Christ , ver. 4. to 9.

The Substance or Body of this Propheticall Book . c. 1. v. 9. to c. 22. v. 6. Wherein is contained a Narration of the State of the Church . I. Militant on earth . c. 1. v. 9. to c. 20. v. 11. II. Triumphant in heaven , c. 20. v. 11. to c. 22. v. 6.

The Condition of the Church Militant is declared 1. For present , what it was when Iohn wrote the Revelation , c. 1. v. 9. to c. 4. v. 1. 2. For future , what it should be till the judgement day . c. 4. v. 1. to c. 20. v. 11.

I. Uision .

I. Touching the State of the Church then present . viz. The Asian Churches principally ; are laid downe two things , viz. 1. A Preparation to the discovery of it , by A Vision of seven Golden Candlesticks and seven Starres . This is Iohn's first vision . And here we have a description , both of Iohn who had the vision : as also of the vision it selfe ; both in respect of the 1 Forme of it . The 2 Effect it had upon Iohn , and the 3 Consequents ensuing thereupon . viz. The Comforting of John , Command to write the vision , and the Interpretation of the vision , c. 1. v. 9. to the end of the chapter . 2. A Narration or Description of the Condition of Christs Church then present , and this in Seven distinct Epistles , directed to the seven Angels of those seven Asian Churches . viz. 1. Of Ephesus , c. 2. v. 1. to 8. 2. Of Smyrna , c. 2. v. 8. to 12. 3. Of Pergamus , c. 2. v. 12. to 18. 4. Of Thyatira , c. 2. v. 18. to the end of the chapter . 5. Of Sardis , c. 3 , 1. to 7. 6. Of Philadelphia , c. 3. v. 7. to 14. 7. Of Laodicea , c. 3. v. 14. to the end of the chapter ▪ In all which Seven Epistles ▪ the same method is generally observed by the spirit of Christ , viz. Every Epistle , containing 1. A Description of Jesus Christ , suitable to the vision of him , in c. 1. formerly . 2. A Narratio● of the Good commendable ; or Evill condemnable in the Angel of every Church , and so in every Church . 3. Promises or Threats , proportionable to their vertues or vices , 4. Hortatory Conclusions , inciting to attention ,

II. Touching the state of the Church for the future , especially the European Churches , This is insisted upon more largely and more mystically . Which in sum amounts to thus much , viz. To Pre-monish the Church of her great tribulations in this world , 1 By persecuting Tyrants , 2 Then by persecuting Hereticks , 3 At length by Anti-Christs most cruell Oppressions both corporall and spirituall . Against all which the holy-Ghos● intermingles many comforts to the Church , as that 1 God will be with her in all her distresses and not forsake her . 2 Her troubles shall not be endlesse , nor over-long . 3. Her enemies shall all of them at last be utterly destroyed . 4. The Church shall at last be set in a safe and happy condition in this world , but especially in the world to come . Now all these things are laid down visionally , in six other visions , remarkably distinct from one another , viz. II. Vision . c. 4 , 5 , 6 , 7. III. Vision . c. 7 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 11 , IIII. Vision . c. 12 , 13 , 14. V. Vision . c. 15 , 16. VI. Vision . c. 17 , 18 , 19. VII . Vision . c. 20 , 21 , 22. to v. 6. All which Visions seem to be comprized in two distinct Prophecies , or Systemes of Visions , parallel and contemporary to one another . Both revealing the mysteries for substance , but the later proceeding more punctually to particulars , as some are of opinion ; Others rather think the former Prophecy comprehends the destinies of the Romane Empire , under seven Seals and seven Trumpets ; The later Prophecy , the destinies of the Church , or of Christian Religion . The I. Prophecy beginning with the B. Sealed with 7. Seals c. 4. v. 1. ending c. 11. II. Prophecy , beginning c. 12. v. 1. ( yet so as to take in some passages mentioned in the fifth Trumpet , as the Little book , the measuring of the Temple , the outer Court , the two Witnesses ) continuing to the end of the Book . Now the sober considering , and wise comparing of these two distinct Prophecies with one another , may ( as some think , ) singularly serve to clear many difficulties throughout this Book ,

II. Uision .

THE I. PROPHECY BEGINNETH .

The State of the Church future is revealed to JOHN , in a mysterious vision of A Book sealed with seven Seals , ( All the particular mysteries in which Book , what man on earth can certainly and infallibly open , unlesse he had Iohn's Apocalypticall Key ? ) Here consider the I. Preparatorys to the opening of the Seals , viz. 1. The Vision of God sitting upon a glorious Throne in heaven , c. 4. wherein are ● . The Transition to this vision , v. 1. 2. The Description of God enthroned in heaven , v. 2 , 3. 3. Em●le●es of Majesty about the Throne , viz. 1 Twen●y ●oure Elders , 2 Lightnings , Thunders , Voices , 3 Seven Lamps , i. e. the seven Spirits of God , 4 A Sea of glasse , 5 Foure living Creatures , 6 The Songs of Prayse , presented to him that sate on the Throne by the foure Beasts , and ●●enty foure Elders , vers. 4. to the end of the chapter . 2. The vision of a Book , in the hand of him that sate on the Throne , sealed with seven Seales , c. 5. Here note 1. The sealed Book described , v. 1. 2. The inability of all creatures to open the book , v. 2 , 3 , 4. 3. The Lambs ability to open it , who stood before the Throne , v. 5 , 6 , 7. 4. The foure beasts and twenty foure Elders Gratulation , with Adoration to the Lamb for opening it ▪ vers. 8. to the end of the chapter . II. The Opening of the seven Seals themselves in Order , c. 6 , 7 , 8. In the opening of which Seals is revealed to Iohn , what shall be the future State of the Church of God , from that time to the end of the world . In the Seventh of which Seales are brought in seven Trumpets ; & in the Seventh of which Trumpets , are brought in Seven vials of the wrath of God , full of the Seven last plagues . More particularly consider here the I. Seale opened , where 1 The attention required , 2 The matter revealed in it , viz. A white horse &c. c. 6. verse 1.2 . II. Seale opened , where 1 Attention called for . 2 The mystery revealed , A Red horse , &c. c. 6. v. 3.4 . III. Seale opened , where 1 Attention is incited . 2 The Mystery revealed , A Black horse , his rider having Ballances in his hand , A spirituall famine threatned , c. 6. v. 5 , 6. IV. Seale opened , where 1 Attention is stirred up 2 Matter Revealed , A pale horse and his rider Death , hell following , &c. c. 6. ver. 7.8 . V. Seale opened , where note 1 What was seen , soules under the Altar , martyred . 2. What these soules did , cryed for vengeance . 3. What they obtained , 1 White Robes for present , 2 Promise of compleat glory with their fellow martyrs , c. 6. v. 9.10.11 . VI. Seale opened , setting forth God● dreadfull judgements upon the enemies of the Church , for their bloody cruelties exercised to death upon the Saints , as was intimated in the fifth Seale . Here are considerable , 1. The Signes seen by Iohn , viz. A great earthquake , The Sunne became black , &c. c. 6 , v. 12 , 13 , 14. 2. The things signified , viz. Kings , great men , &c i. e. all sorts and degrees of Persecutors , in horrour and despaire at their wits ends , by reason of Gods judgements coming upon them from Christ so terribly , as if the very judgement-day were come , c. 6. vers. 15.16.17 .

III. Uision .

VII . Seale opened . Here consider 1 Preparatories to it , 2 Mysterious Contents of it .

1. Preparatories to it , are in c. 7. fore-arming the Church with previous consolations against all ensuing miseries that were to come upon it : Against which evils the Holy Ghost here comforts the Church . 1. By that security , which the Angel of God , sealing the servants of God in their foreheads , shall afford them in midst of troubles , c. 7 , 1. to 9. 2. By that triumphant victory , which after their great tribulation , all the faithfull shall have over all their miseries and enemies , c. 7. v. 9. to the end of the chapter . 2. Mysteries revealed in the opening of this seventh Seale ; being farre more , and those more intricate to understand , then in the opening of any of the other six Seals . Events following the opening of the seventh Seale , are either I. Preparatory , as 1. Silence in heaven for halfe an houre , portending great things to follow , c. 8.1 . 2. Vision of seven Angels with seven Trumpets , v. 2. 3. Vision of another Angel , and his actions , viz. offering up of incense ; and casting the fire of the Altar into the earth , c. 8. v. 3. 4 , 5. 4. Preparation of the seven Angels to sound their Trumpets v. 6. II. Executory , viz. the Angels actuall sounding of their seven Trumpets . c. 8. v. 7. &c. to c. 12.1 . I. Trumpet sounded , where consider , 1. The Signe following ▪ Haile and fire mingled with bloud cast upon the earth , 2 The effect thereof , viz. The third part of trees burnt , &c. c. 8. v. 7. II. Trumpet sounded , where 1. The Signe following , viz. A great mountaine burning with fire cast into the sea . 2. The effect ensuing , the third part of the sea became blood , &c. c. 8. v. 8.9 . III. Trumpet sounded , where , 1. The Signe ensuing thereupon . A great star fell from heaven — called worm-wood , 2. The effects thereof , viz. The third part of the waters became bitter , and many died of them , c. 8. v. 10 , 11. IV. Trumpet sounded , where 1. The Signe . viz. The third part of sun , moon and stars smitten . 2. The effects thereupon . viz. day and night shone not for a third part , c. 8. v. 12.

Here is annexed ( by way of Preparatory Transition to the other three Trumpets , ) John's vision of an Angel flying through the midst of heaven , denouncing three Woes by reason of the three last Trumpets , c. 8 , 13.

I. Woe .

V. Trumpet sounded , where note 1. The Signe appearing , viz. A starre falling from heaven to earth . 2. The foure effects of this starre falling , viz. He opens the bottomlesse pit , Thence raiseth up smoake . Darkens Sunne and aire with the smoake , and brings Locusts unto the earth out of the smoake , which LOCUSTS are variously and notably described . 3. The Conclusion shutting up the Calamities of this Trumpet , and forewarning of them that follow , c. 9. 1. to 13.

II. Woe .

VI. Trumpet sounded , c. 9. v. 13. to the end of the chapter . Herein consider , 1. The Command to loose the foure Angels bound in Euphrates , v. 13 , 14. 2. Execution of this command , v. 15. 3. The Description of the large Army of Euphratean Horses and Horsemen , v. 15 , 16 , 17. 4. The Calamitous effects wrought by them , v. 18 , 19 , 20 , 21.

VII . Trumpet , Concerning which note . 1. Preparatories to it . 2. Sounding of it .

I. Preparatoryes to it ( it being the Trumpet of highest concernment , because when that shall be sounded , The mystery of God shall be finished ▪ as he hath declared to his servants the Prophets , c. 10 , 7. ) are very largely premised , c. 10 , 1 , to c. 11.15 . Which seems principally to be Consolatory to the Church , against all her former and future tribulations , and this by the Vision of a mighty Angel come down from heaven , viz. Jesus Christ himselfe the Angel of the Covenant . Touching whom here are , 1. The Angels description , c. 10. ver. 1. 2. The Angels Actions , 1. Held a little Book in his hand , 2. Set his right foot on the Sea , his left on the land . 3. Roared as a Lyon ; 7. thunders ecchoing again . 4. Swore that time should be no more , but when the 7th Angel should sound , the mystery of God should be finished , c. 10. v. 2. to 8. 3. The Angels commands to John , 1. To eate the little Book in the Angels hand , that he might Prophecy ▪ c. 10.8 , 9 , 10 , 11. 2. To measure the Temple , Altar , and worshippers , but not the Court ; for it should be trodden under foot of the Gentiles 42. moneths , c. 11. v. 1 , ● . 4. The Angels promises concerning his two Winesses , and their Prophecy , and how after they shall be killed by the Beast upon the finishing of their testimony . They shall againe Revive , c. 11. v. 3. to 14.

Thus the Second Woe is ended , and the third hastneth , v. 14.

III. Woe .

II. Sounding of the seventh Trumpet , wherein the Mystery of God is finished . And the Churches Miseries ended , c. ● 1. v. 15. to the end of the chap. where consider , I. Things heard in heaven , viz. 1. Great voyces , saying ▪ The Kingdomes of this world are become the Lords , and his Christs , &c. ver. 15. 2. The triumphant song or gratulation of the 24. Elders unto God , for honouring himselfe , and for the coming of his judgement to reward the Saints , and destroy the earth , ver. 16. 17 , 18. II Things seene &c. In Gods Temple opened in heaven , viz. 1. The Saints Rewards , The Ark of his Testament , i. e. Jesus Christ . 2. The wickeds Rewards , Lightnings , voices , thundrings , earthquakes and great haile , ver. 19.

The former Prophecy endeth .

IV. Uision

THE II PROPHECY BEGINNETH .

Hitherto of the I. Prophecy , or Systeme of Visions , Denoting ( as is thought by some ) more especially the Condition of the last Empire viz. the Romane : Now to the II Prophecy or Systeme of Visions , ( contemporary with the former both in the Seales and Trumpets ) foretelling chiefly the future condition of the Church till the judgement day . Herein chiefly are set down , 1. The Tribulations and Persecutions of the Church by severall enemies . 2. The deliverance of the Church by her enemies destruction . 3. The happy condition of the Church , upon her deliverance . Though the common opinion of interpreters ( who take not any notice of 2 contemporary Prophesies , and their Synchronismes , but judge these Visions to be one continued Prophecy , ) bring all that followes under the seventh Trumpet , thus . viz. The sounding of the seventh Trumpet is propounded , I. Summarily , c. 11.15 . to the end of the chap. II. Plenarily , and this either , 1. By way of Recognition and fuller explaining of the former Seales and Trumpets , in a digression , c. 12 , 13 , 14. 2. By way of Prediction of things future under the seventh Trumpet more largely , c. 15 , 16 , 17 , &c. For substance these will come much to one . ( But le ts follow the former . )

I. The Persecutions of the Church by severall enemies greatly distressing her in this whole fourth Vision , c. 12. ver. 1. to c. 15. ver. 1. More particularly here note , I. The Persecution of the woman that brought forth the man-child , viz. Both Jesus Christ , and the Primitive Church of the Jewes ( as some are of opinion ) even from her infancy ; and this by Dragon , i. e , ( as is expounded c. 12. ver. 9. ) Satan ▪ c. 12. v. 1. to 17. II. The Dragons Persecution of , and making war with the remnant of her seed . Viz. ( as some thinke ) with the Church of the Gentiles , where consider , 1. The Dragons Resolution and endeavours thus to persecute , c. 12. v. 17. 2 , The instruments of Persecution , incited and imployed by the great Red Dragon , viz. 1. The Beast rising up out of the Sea having seaven heads and ten hornes , c. 13. ver. 1. to 11. 2. The Beast rising out of the earth , having two hornes like a Lambe , and speaking as a Dragon , &c. c. 13. ver. 11. to the end of the chap. 3. The event of this Persecution , viz. The Saints Victory through their constant and faithfull confession of Christ even to Martyrdom , this their victory being exellently amplifyed by the Causes , and Effects of it , c. 14. 1. to the end of the chap.

V. Uision .

II. The Deliverance of the Church , by the destruction of her enemies represented in the Vision of the 7. Vials full of the wrath of God , the 7. last plagues , poured out upon the eart● by 7. Angels , Here are , the I. Preparatories to the pouring out of the Vials c. 15 , throughout . II. Pouring out of the Vials of the wrath of God upon the earth , c. 16.1 . &c. viz. I. Vial poured out , c. 16. ver. 2. II. Vial poured out , v. 3. III. Vial poured out , v. 4. to 8. IV. Vial poured out , v. 8 , 9. V. Vial poured out , v. 10 , 11. VI. Vial poured out , v. 12. to 17. VII . Vial poured out , c. 16.

This pouring out of the VII . Vial , is laid down , 1. More Summarily , 2. More Plenarily .

I. More Summarily & compendiously c. 16. ver. 17. to the end of the chap.

VI Uision .

II. More plenarily and copiously , c. 17 , 18 , 19 , & 20 to ver. 11. Wherin divers mysteries are most lively explicated , which formerly were heretofore more obscurely mentioned . Notably pointing out the Rise , Seate , Reigne , Vassals , Successe , and at last the fatall Ruine of Anti-christ and all the Churches enemies . So that this part affords no small light to the Prophetick part of the Revelation . Here consider , 1. The judgement of the great whore . 2. The event thereupon .

I. The judgement of the great whore c. 17 , 18 , 19. Where are , 1. A notable description of the great whore , that is to be judged ; By Visionall Representation , c. 17.1 . to 7. By real explanation therof , v. 7. to 16. 2. The instruments that shall destroy the Whore . viz. The ten hornes , which are ten Kings , &c. c. 17. ver. 16 , 17 , 18. 3. The Emphatical promulgation of the woful ruine of Babylon , the Seate of the great whore , This is done by three Angels , 1. The first Angel declares the inevitable certainty of Babylons ruine , c. 18..1 , 2 , 3. 2. The second warning all God's people to come out of her , sets forth the grievousnesse of her destruction , with the sad lamentations of all her friends and vassals , ver. 4. to 21. 3. The third Angel , under the type of a great Milstone cast into the Sea , as it were seales up the irrecoverablenesse of her ruine , ver. 21 , 22 , 23 , 24. 4. The gratulatory exaltations of the heavenly company 1 for the judgement of the whore , 2 for the preparation of the Lamb's wife for marriage with him , c. 19. ver. 1. to 11. 5. The finall and totall conquest of the Lamb and his Armies , over the beast and false Prophet , and the Kings of the earth and their Armies , c. 19. v. 11. to the end of the chap. Hitherto of the judgement of the great Whore .

VII . Or last Uision .

II. The event following after the judgement of the great Whore ; which is chiefly three-fold , 1. The safety of the Saints ( surviving the ruine of Babylon ) from the seducements of the Dragon , the Devil and Satan , being chained up 1000 yeares , c. 20.1.2 , 3. 2. The reviving of the Martyrs , and raigning with Christ 1000. yeares , the rest of the dead not living again till the 1000. yeares were finished , c , 20. v. 4 , 5 , 6. 3. The Saints miraculous deliverance from , and victory over Gog and Magog ; ( Satan , after the 1000. yeares expired , being loosed out of prison . ) c. 20. v. 7. to 11.

Hitherto ( as is conceived ) hath been Revealed the future state of the Church as Militant on earth .

The condition of the Church as triumphant in heaven , is described both in respect of the 1. Inchoation ▪ and 2. Duration of it .

1. The Inchoation or beginning of the Churches triumph , shall be at the last and generall judgement : which is pathetically described , c. 20. v. 11. to the end of the chapt. 2. The Duration or Continuance of it ; viz. Eternal happinesse in Heaven , which is most gloriously set forth , c. 21. throughout &c. 22. ver. 1. to 6.

The Conclusion of this whole Prophecy ; which is either , 1. Principal , containing a confirmation of the whole Prophecy of this Revelation , by the Testimony , 1. Of the Angel , by whom the Lord shewed these things to John , c. 22. v. 6. 2. Of Christ himselfe , who gave this Revelation , ver. 7. 3. Of Iohn that received this Revelation , ver. 8 , 9. 4. Of Christ againe , ver. 10 to 18. 5. Of Iohn denouncing heavie judgements upon all that shall adde to , or take from this Prophecy , ver. 18 , 19. 6. Of Christ testifying these things , Promising his speedy coming ; amplified by Iohn's earnest request in his own and the Churches behalfe , ver. 20. 2. Lesse Principall , containing the Apostolicall Salutation to all the 7. Churches and faithfull Saints to whom this Revelation was written , ver. 21.

He that testifieth these things , saith ; I come quickly . Amen . Even so , Come LORD JESUS .

Rev. 22.20 . D. Bernard . Medit. Devot . c. 4.

Praemium est videre deum , vivere cum Deo , vivere de Deo ; esse cum Deo esse , in Deo , quierit omnia in omnibus : habere Deum qui est Summum Bonum . Et ubi est summum bonum , ibi est summa felicitas , summa jucunditas , vera libe●tas , perfecta charitas , aeterna securitas , & secura aeternitas : ibi est vera laetitia , plena scientia , omnis plenitudo , & omnis Beatitudo .

Sic cum Deo homo Beatus erit , in cujus conscientia peccatum inventum non fuerit . Videbit Deum ad voluntatem , habebit ad voluptatem , fruetur ad jucunditatem . In aeternitate vigebit , in veritate fulgebit , in bonitate gaudebit .

1 Tim. 1.17 .

〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉〈◊〉 .